JP2010142607A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine which enables the sustenance of expectations felt for the winning of prescribed minor winning combinations. <P>SOLUTION: When any of three-option winning combinations (1)-(3) with the timings of stop operation being varied, is won, when a stop switch is operated at a stop operation timing different from that for drafting and stopping the figures making up the three-option winning combination won onto the prize winning line, a reel control is carried out to draft and stop the figures making up the three-option winning combinations not won, preferably onto the prize winning line. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the identification information is derived in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of identification information on a predetermined winning line derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas after the game is over.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

In such a slot machine, among a plurality of types of predetermined small combinations having different proper operation timings that can be awarded, a small role notification game state is provided in which the type of the predetermined small combination that was won in the internal lottery can be specified and specified. There was something to control (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).
JP 2002-11152 A

  However, in the slot machine of Patent Document 1, even if one of a plurality of types of predetermined small combinations is won, the slot machine is not operated at an appropriate operation timing corresponding to the selected predetermined small combination. In such a case, it is not possible to stop the symbols constituting the selected small combination selected as appropriate on an effective line. Further, in such a case, the reel control is not performed so that the symbols constituting the predetermined small combination that is not won are stopped on the effective line, and the reel control that does not generate any winnings is performed. It was.

  For this reason, for example, when the game is not in the small role notification gaming state, and when the player is operated at an appropriate operation timing corresponding to the predetermined small role that the player is predicted to win, If the winning is not won, the reel control is not performed so that the symbols constituting the predicted small role are preferentially stopped on the effective line. Is wrong, and the expectation to win the predicted small role is lost. As a result, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost early in the middle of the game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can maintain a sense of expectation for winning a predetermined small role.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the identification information is derived in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated in accordance with a combination of identification information on a predetermined winning line derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas after the game has ended,
Whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a plurality of types of specific winnings (three choices (1) to (3)) before the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Predetermining means to determine (internal lottery process)
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving the identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas;
According to the operation accepted by the derivation operation accepting means, each of the plurality of variable display areas can be derived within a predetermined delay time (maximum stop delay time, 190 milliseconds) from the time when the operation is accepted. Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for deriving identification information according to the determination result of the prior determination means from among the identification information,
At least a specific variable display area (left reel 2L) of the plurality of variable display areas is a combination of identification information for generating a first specific prize (three choices (1)) of the plurality of types of specific prizes. The second identification information constituting the combination of the first identification information ("Red 7") that constitutes and the identification information that generates the second specific prize (three choices (2)) of the plurality of types of specific prizes ("White 7") and the identification information are variably displayed so that they are not included in the range of identification information that can be derived within the range of the delay time (see the left reel 2L in FIG. 3).
The derivation control means is a first winning allowance derivation control means for performing control for deriving identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when it is determined that the occurrence of the first specific winning is permitted. 3 selection combination (1) reel control at the time of winning) and control for deriving identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when it is determined that the second specific winning is permitted. And a second winning allowance derivation control means (refer to 3 alternative roles (2) reel control at the time of winning),
The first winning allowance derivation control means includes:
In a state where the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the identification information derivable within the delay time range includes the first identification information in the specific variable display area at a first timing. When an operation for deriving the identification information is accepted (when the symbol numbers 4 to 10 of the left reel 2L pass the lower stage when the stop switch 8L is operated), the first identification information is derived on the winning line, Also in other variable display areas other than the specific variable display area, first specific identification information constituting a combination of identification information for generating the first specific prize is derived on the winning line (see FIG. 20A). ),
In a state in which the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the identification information derivable within the delay time range includes the second identification information in the specific variable display area at a second timing. When an operation for deriving the identification information is accepted (when the symbol numbers 0 to 3 and 18 to 20 of the left reel 2L pass the lower stage when the stop switch 8L is operated), the second identification information is placed on the winning line. While deriving (see FIG. 20A), in the other variable display area, the second specific identification information constituting the combination of identification information for generating the second specific winning is not derived on the winning line ( Reel control that does not generate winning prizes that are not won)
The second winning allowance derivation control means includes:
When the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, when the operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area is accepted at the second timing, the second identification information is received as the prize. And the second specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the other variable display area (see FIG. 20A),
When the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the first identification information is received as the winning when an operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area is received at the first timing. In addition to being derived on the line (see FIG. 20A), in the other variable display area, the first specific identification information is not derived on the winning line (reel control that does not generate a winning combination that is not won). .

  According to such a configuration, the timing at which the operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area in the state where the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas can be derived within the range of the delay time. When the first timing includes the first identification information constituting the combination of the identification information for generating the first specific prize in the identification information, not only when the generation of the first specific prize is permitted but also the second Even when the generation of the specific winning is permitted, the control for deriving the first identification information on the winning line is performed, and the identification information for generating the second specific winning in the identification information derivable within the range of the delay time. When the second timing including the second identification information constituting the combination is not only when the second specific winning is permitted, but also when the first specific winning is permitted Control is performed to derive a second identification information on the pay line. Thereby, in the stage where identification information was derived | led-out to the specific variable display area, the expectation with respect to generation | occurrence | production of a 1st specific prize or a 2nd specific prize can be maintained, and the interest of a game can be improved. .

  When predetermined notification conditions are established (granting navigation right), the first information is notified when the first specific winning is permitted, and the second specific winning is permitted. Sometimes, a notification means (navigation effect execution process) for notifying the second information may be provided. Thus, when the notification condition is satisfied and the first information and the second information are notified, the user can operate according to the information, and the notification condition is not satisfied and the first information and the second information are notified. Even when it is not, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the first specific prize or the second specific prize at the stage where the identification information is derived in the specific variable display area.

  The first winning allowance derivation control means may be any means that does not generate the second specific winning, and the second specific identification information is stored in the at least one variable display area among the other variable display areas. It may be derived on a winning line. The second winning allowance derivation control means may be any means that does not generate the first specific winning, and the first specific identification information is stored in at least one of the other variable display areas. It may be derived on a winning line.

  Further, the first identification information and the first specific identification information that constitute the combination of identification information for generating the first specific prize may be the same type of identification information or different types of identification information. Good. Further, the second identification information and the second specific identification information constituting the combination of identification information for generating the second specific prize may be the same type of identification information or different types of identification information. Good.

(2) After the first winning allowance deriving control means derives the second identification information on the winning line of the specific variable display area, the first winning allowance deriving control means is the last among the other variable display areas. The second specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the variable display area excluding the final variable display area from which the identification information is derived, and is different from the second specific identification information on the winning line in the final variable display area. The identification information is derived (see FIG. 20B),
After the second winning allowance derivation control means derives the first identification information on the winning line of the specific variable display area, the identification information is finally included in the other variable display areas. The first specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the variable display area excluding the derived final variable display area, and identification information different from the first specific identification information is provided on the winning line in the final variable display area. Derived (see FIG. 20B).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for occurrence of the first specific prize or the second specific prize until the identification information is derived in the final variable display area.

  (3) In the state in which the derivation control unit is not allowed to generate any of the first specific winning and the second specific winning and the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas. When the derivation operation accepting unit accepts an operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area at the first timing, the derivation operation acceptance unit causes the first identification information to be derived on the winning line, and the second When received at the timing, the second identification information is derived on the winning line, and the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information are not derived on the winning line in the other variable display area. It includes derivation control means (see FIG. 20) when allowed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the occurrence of the first specific prize or the second specific prize is not permitted, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the first specific prize or the second specific prize. .

  The allowable time derivation control means may be any means that does not generate the first specific winning and the second specific winning, and the first specific identification in at least one of the other variable display areas. Information or the second specific identification information may be derived on the winning line.

(4) The first specific identification information and the second specific identification information are the same type of specific identification information ("melon"),
The derivation control means, in a state where the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, before the derivation operation accepting means accepts an operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area. When the operation for deriving the identification information to the other variable display area is accepted, the other area preceding derivation control is performed such that the specific identification information is preferentially derived on the winning line among the plurality of types of identification information. Means (see FIG. 20B).

  According to such a configuration, even when the identification information is derived in another variable display area prior to the specific variable display area, it is expected that the first specific prize or the second specific prize will occur. Can last.

  (5) When one of the first specific prize and the second specific prize occurs, a predetermined privilege (navigation right grant lottery execution) that is different from the provision of game value for setting the bet amount Is further provided with a privilege granting means (navigation right granting process).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the first specific prize or the second specific prize is generated and the privilege is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) command output means (main control unit 41) for outputting a command (internal winning command) for specifying a winning type that is allowed to be generated among the plurality of types of winnings;
When a predetermined notification condition is established, notification means (effect control board 90, sub-control unit 91, navigation effect execution process) for notifying information that can identify the type of winning that is allowed based on the command is generated. )
The informing means carries out a process for deriving the same identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when the derivation operation accepting means accepts an operation in an operation procedure based on predetermined operation procedure information ( The test apparatus 1300) includes external output means (IF board (sub) 1200) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure,
When the notification condition is satisfied, the external output means has, as the recommended operation procedure information, operation procedure information (replay GR (1) for specifying an operation procedure according to information notified by the notification device. ) Stop execution position signal indicating the symbol “BAR” of symbol number 17 of the left reel 2L at the time of winning, 3 alternatives (1) Stop execution indicating symbol of “red 7” of symbol number 10 of the left reel 2L when winning Position signal).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to specify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player by notifying the information by the notification means. A test can be performed based on a display result derived when operated by a procedure. As a result, it is possible to obtain a game value grant rate in the market by a test using an external test apparatus.

  (7) When the notification condition is not satisfied, the external output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) as the recommended operation procedure information (see FIG. 23).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to specify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player even when the information is not notified by the notification means. The test can be performed based on the display result derived when operated by such an operation procedure. As a result, it is possible to obtain a game value grant rate in the market by a test using an external test apparatus.

  (8) When the notification condition is not satisfied, the external output means, as the recommended operation procedure information, receives a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision device according to a predetermined first operation procedure. Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when operated is output (see FIG. 23).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to specify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player even when the information is not notified by the notification means. The test can be performed based on the display result derived when operated by such an operation procedure. As a result, it is possible to obtain a game value grant rate in the market by a test using an external test apparatus.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring a detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

(D) On the condition that the special gaming state has ended, a high-probability state in which the pre-determining means makes a decision to allow the occurrence of the re-game winning with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state ( RT) with high probability state control means to control,
The special prize for generating the special prize is a combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas constituting the variable display device (for example, the big bonus (1) is “red 7-grape-melon”. , Big Bonus (2) is composed of “Grape-White 7-BAR” etc.)
The slot machine further controls so that it becomes difficult for the player to specify the type controlled to the special gaming state after the special winning is generated until the special gaming state ends. (A bonus presentation of the same content is performed regardless of the type) (see Modification (9)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the special prize that has occurred from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of special gaming state is being controlled. For this reason, the number of games controlled to a high probability state becomes difficult to understand compared to the conventional slot machine in which the type of special prize is specified from the display result. Can effectively improve the interest of the game.

(E) A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when a small role winning occurs among the plurality of types of winnings;
Procedure for performing procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be derived by the prior determination means A notification means (game effect execution process),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (the number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing after being controlled to the high probability state.
The expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting unit per game in the high probability state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification unit when it is within the notification period. When the stop operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet amount is larger than the amount of game value used for setting the bet number. (See modification (9)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when in the high probability state and within the notification period is determined by operating the number of bets by operating according to the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of game value used for setting. The high probability state is continued at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the high probability state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation according to the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the amount of games to be given when the player is in a high probability state and within the notification period. Useful value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(F) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(G) In the slot machine of (F), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b), and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

  (H) After the start of a high probability state in which control is performed to derive a winning that allows a next game without using the gaming value with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state, the game is digested If the pre-determining means determines that the special winning (bonus) is allowed to occur before the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, the special probability is not terminated and the special probability is not terminated. The high probability state may be terminated when a winning occurs or when the number of games digested without the special winning reaches the prescribed number of games (see Modification (9)). ).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of a special prize is permitted after the high probability state is started and before the specified number of games is reached, the special prize permitted by the determination is generated. Otherwise, the high probability state does not end with the determination, and the high probability state can be continuously controlled until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, even if it is decided to allow the occurrence of a special prize in the high probability state, if the special prize permitted by the decision does not occur, the high probability state can be digested until the specified number of games is reached. Compared with the conventional slot machine where the high probability state ends due to the high probability state being allowed to generate a special prize, the player feels lost when controlled to a high probability state. There is no giving. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it is decided that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed while being controlled to a high probability state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

(I) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is won. You may comprise so that the control which derives | leads-out the said specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be performed on top (refer modification (8-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(J) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed (refer modification (8-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve a problem in which it is difficult to determine whether the winning prize has been missed. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(K) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-decision means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is made. And the probability that the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1) And the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination occupying the total probability of the sheet (2) + BB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first decision (orange, plum) or the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5). Control to derive the plum)
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the second general winning line (winning lines L4, L5) has a higher proportion than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3). You may comprise so that the control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating a prize may be performed (refer modification (8-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(L) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-decision means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + BB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + BB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) ( (Orange-Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) ( You may comprise so that control which derives | leads-out orange-orange-orange and plum-plum-plum) may be performed (refer modification (8-2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1a.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “red 7 (in FIG. 3, black 7 pattern)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “white strawberry”, A plurality of mutually distinguishable items such as “black strawberry (black strawberry pattern in FIG. 3)”, “melon”, “banana”, “star (star symbol in FIG. 3)”, “watermelon”, “grape” 21 types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet amount) The payout switch 10 that is operated when starting the game, the start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and the operation when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L which, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100, in order to select valid / invalid of a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus or challenge bonus described later. The automatic settlement function for controlling the automatic settlement process (a process for settlement (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus or challenge bonus described later. It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalid, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. Is a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) of internal lottery to be described later Reset / setting switch 38 that serves as the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use the credit, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper side of the reel 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols: the winning line L4, the upper reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, the lower reel 2R; It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  As will be described later, during the challenge time, the number of frames that can be drawn into a predetermined reel is limited. Specifically, when the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is operated, the maximum number of frames that can be displayed in the lower row is 1 when the symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 2L is used as a reference. Limited to frames.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED driving circuit 47 for performing power supply power supplied to the slot machine 1 When a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a The reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Supplied to the reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, the clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and the slot machine 1 Power supply voltage is monitored and when a voltage drop is detected, The position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 is specified based on the signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 and the light receiving devices 56b and 57b that output a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub-control unit 91. A touch panel controller 99 that performs processing and the like, and other circuits are mounted. The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs an effect. While performing various controls, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Execute. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted as described above, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). As a result, the wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions on the main body of the slot machine 1 is facilitated, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, and therefore, the cable and the board that connect these boards to each other and the board to the game electronic component The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving tool is, for example, operating various switches provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of a signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from a game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There is a risk that the fairness of

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by members.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. Restricts the release of connections between connectors. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not provided. A similar effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connector and the connector to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that the RB is being described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB, which will be described later, an SB signal indicating that the gaming state is SB, which will be described later, and a CB during which the gaming state is described later. CB signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, a setting change signal indicating that the front door 1b is being opened, a setting error signal indicating that the medal selector is abnormal, a hopper A payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the unit 34 is output. In this embodiment, a spare output signal line that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 for electrical connection with the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, the SB signal, and the CB signal are directly provided as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. It is output to the terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, SB signal, CB signal, and CB signal output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, an AND circuit or the like outputs any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it becomes unnecessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals to be paid out Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the reel motor stop control in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control while being guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  Important work is data that stores inconvenience when initialized at the end of a big bonus or challenge bonus, such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O port 41d input / output data, game time clock counter, etc. It is. General work is initialized at the end of each game, data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus or challenge bonus, such as stop control table, stop symbol, number of medals paid out, total number of medals paid out during the big bonus or challenge bonus This is a work in which a winning flag (small role, replay, single bonus) and a winning flag are stored.

  The special work is initialized at the time of winning without being cleared at the end of each game, data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc. The winning flag (big bonus or challenge bonus) and the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game are stored. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. The set value that has been corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and when the transition to the setting change mode is performed, when initialization is performed or when a RAM abnormality error occurs In the initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 1 is the state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is the initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, By maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after changing the setting. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . Note that the data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase workpiece can be matched. Thereafter, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excitation in match condition, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation), similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated).

  In this embodiment, the medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a and the full tank state is determined. However, whether or not the overflow tank 35 is provided and the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by a full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects a full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. By determining that the tank is full when it is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which it is determined that the tank is full.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. The main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. Even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full is performed. The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the amount of medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not it is in a state, it is controlled by a full error more frequently than necessary, which causes trouble for the player, and also the labor of the game hall clerk There is a problem that it increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. It can reduce the control load required to determine the tank status and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor of the store clerk to eliminate the full tank status. Is possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is performed when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination as to whether the medal is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after completion of the game control, whether or not there is a full tank error at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when the medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since a full tank state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once by being controlled to a full tank error state between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is released, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is resumed, or the medal payout operation is performed by driving the hopper motor 34b. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the player is in a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected after the end of the game control. For example, it may be determined whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, or a game start operation A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modification, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full CPU state is based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the tank is full. Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the control of the game ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not a full tank state has been reached based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), the state is determined to be full, and the full error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), the state is determined to be full, and the full error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after completion of the game control, only once per game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, whether or not the full state is reached based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. When it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is made wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modified example, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. If no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently It can be monitored and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming the control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when payout of medals is started by winning or winning a credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command includes the game state of the next game (whether it is the initial game state, RT, BB, CB, SB, etc.) and the currently set setting. This command can specify a value, and is transmitted after a setting end command to be described later and at the end of the game. In addition, when it is configured to end when the number of games that digest RT has reached a predetermined number of games, the number of remaining games of the RT may be further specified by a gaming state command.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the specified number of bets has not yet been set, and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 has been accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in a startup process and a game process to be described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in the door command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. In the operation detection command transmission buffer, when the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the settlement switch 10 is changed, An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the command cannot be received normally on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In this embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is subtracted by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  The timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (during delay), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested.The power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting for transmission is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting for transmission After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic in the port input process performed in any of timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the determination state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer monitoring process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms is acquired in the above-described port input process. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring processing 5 1) BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production has not been completed until the end, when a new command is received, the production that has been executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when a final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for reception of the initialization command or power-on command, the execution of timer interrupt processing that performs presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even if other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the start-up and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on, and then the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines that are set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since the production device is informed that it is in progress, it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in the state where the special role is won using the driving tool is given to the player at the start of operation of the amusement store. Offer It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, and the payout indicator 13 which are directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the winning of the special role. Good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined. No determination is made, and the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform any illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40. In this embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, that fact Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door indicating the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. The front CPU 1a determines whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state, and the door open notification is made based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a notifies that the front door 1b is open. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection Chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement switch 10 In addition to the timing when the control of the game is made effective and coincides with the timing at which the control of the game proceeds, the effect is executed when the operation of these switches is invalid, that is, at a timing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored while the command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, it may affect other controls such as blurring at the time of paying out the command. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated and automatically restored when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more from the touch panel controller 99, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM storing the sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data) to be displayed on (ROM), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM may be designated. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed. Further, the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command, such as the ROM check of the CGROM, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the check of the VRAM, is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the voice ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. There are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a telop “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. It is prohibited to receive a new command until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, a screen divided into 64 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical component are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow in a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, the liquid crystal display 51, and the touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to designate only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. For this reason, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to designate only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing operation tests of production parts in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. Can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. This causes a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a of this embodiment receives an inspection command for designating an operation check of the touch panel and performs an operation check of the touch panel, the command reception interrupt process is performed until a touch operation is detected. During this period, new commands are not received, and even if new commands are transmitted during this period, new commands are not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. Therefore, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally inspected.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that other inspection commands specifying the operation check Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the gaming state includes a big bonus (hereinafter also referred to as BB), a challenge bonus (hereinafter also referred to as CB), a single bonus (hereinafter also referred to as SB), an initial gaming state (hereinafter referred to as BB). 3) is defined as the specified number of bets in any gaming state. Therefore, regardless of the gaming state being controlled, the game can be started when 3 is set as the bet number. In the present embodiment, all the pay lines L1 to L5 are activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set, and the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game player and a special player with a shift to a big bonus, a challenge bonus, and a single bonus. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. Big bonuses, challenge bonuses, and single bonuses are collectively called bonuses. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As the roles in this slot machine 1, BB (1) to (3), CB (1) to (4), and SB are defined as special roles, and three alternative roles (1) to (1) ( 3), melon, star, strawberry (1), (2), watermelon, and 1 sheet role are defined, and replays (1) to (6) are defined as replaying roles.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state.

  The slot machine according to the present embodiment is controlled to one of an initial game state controlled when a predetermined initial condition is satisfied, an RT in which the winning probability of replay is changed, and a bonus controlled by a bonus winning. Is done.

  First, the special role will be described. BB (1) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than the bonus. BB (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than the bonus. BB (3) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than the bonus.

  When any of BB (1) to (3) wins, the main control unit 41 shifts the gaming state to BB. BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 200.

  During the BB, a regular bonus (hereinafter also referred to as RB) is provided. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role. In the RB in the present embodiment, in particular, the winning probability of melon is increased.

  The RB ends when 12 games have been consumed or when 8 games have been won (any kind of combination is acceptable), whichever comes first. When the RB is finished, if the BB is not finished, the process shifts to the RB again, and the RB is repeatedly controlled until the BB is finished. That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied. After the BB is finished, the RT is controlled to increase the winning probability of the re-gamer, the navigation right is given, and the number of times of navigation is incremented by 5.

  The navigation right is a right to execute a navigation effect when at least one of the replays (2) to (6) or the three alternative roles (1) to (3) is won during RT. The navigation right is granted when the BB is completed or when a winning is performed in a predetermined navigation right granting lottery executed during CB or RT. An RT to which a navigation right is granted is also referred to as an RT with a navigation right, and an RT to which no navigation right is granted is also referred to as an RT without a navigation right.

  In addition, the navigation effect is an effect for notifying information that can identify the type of replay that is selected among the replays (2) to (6) during RT with navigation right, and the three-choice roles (1) to ( This refers to the effect of informing information that can identify the type of the three-choice winning combination in 3).

  In addition, the number of times of navigation is not subtracted by winning the three-choice roles (1) to (3) and executing the navigation effect during the RT with navigation right, but winning the replays (2) to (6) The value is decremented by 1 every time the navigation effect is executed. The number of times of navigation in this embodiment is exemplified as a value that is not reset by bonus winning, RT end, or loss of navigation right, but is not limited to this, and depending on at least one of bonus winning, RT end, or loss of navigation right It may be a value to be reset.

  Once the navigation right is granted, the number of times of navigation is reduced to 0 when RTs with navigation right are won by replays (2) to (6) and the navigation effect is executed and subtracted, and RT ends. (Including the case of finishing with a big bonus), the player loses by not being controlled by RT after the end of CB.

As shown in FIG. 16, when BB ends, the gaming state is controlled to RT with navigation right.
Even if BB (1) to (3) are won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 8L to 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win the winning BB, they will win these roles. There is nothing. This is because the symbols (“red 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR”) constituting each of BB (1) to (3) are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  CB (1) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than the bonus. CB (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than the bonus. CB (3) is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-Red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than a bonus. CB (4) is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-White 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than a bonus.

  When any of CB (1) to (4) wins, the main control unit 41 shifts the gaming state to CB. The CB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 200 or when the SB is won.

  During the CB, a challenge time (hereinafter also referred to as CT) is provided. CT is limited to the number of sliding frames of a predetermined reel (left reel 2L in this embodiment) (limited to a maximum of one frame sliding), but it has three choices (1) to (3) regardless of the stop operation timing. A state where the player can win any of the predetermined small roles including. If the CB has not ended, the process proceeds to each game CT, and is repeatedly controlled to CT until the CB ends. That is, during CB, it is always controlled by CT. Note that in a game in which SB is won during CB, the player can win any of the predetermined small roles regardless of the operation timing as in CB, and the reel control similar to that in CB is performed for the left reel 2L. Is done.

  For CB, different control is performed as follows according to the gaming state when winning.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the CB controlled by winning a prize in the initial gaming state, it is determined whether or not a navigation right is granted each time the three-choice roles (1) to (3) are won. A predetermined navigation right grant lottery in which lottery is performed according to a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) is performed. For this reason, it can be said that as the number of games in the CB increases, the number of times the navigation right grant lottery is performed increases and the probability that the navigation right is granted increases.

  In addition, when the CB is finished by paying out 200 sheets, and winning in the navigation right grant lottery and granting the navigation right in the CB, it is transferred to RT with navigation right, and when it is not won in the navigation right grant lottery , Transition to RT without navigation right. Further, when the CB is completed by paying out 200 sheets, the number of times of navigation is increased by 5.

  On the other hand, when the CB ends due to SB winning, it is controlled to the initial gaming state without being controlled by RT. Further, even if a right to navigation is granted by the navigation right grant lottery in the CB, the right to navigation is lost by not being controlled by RT after the CB ends, and the number of times of navigation is not added. That is, if the CB is not controlled by the RT after the CB ends due to the SB winning, the navigation right is not granted as a result.

  Next, in the CB controlled by winning the CB when it is RT, as shown in FIG. 16, the replay probability (RT) is maintained, and the navigation right is maintained when the navigation right is granted. The CT is repeatedly controlled until the CB ends. Hereinafter, a CB in which RT is maintained is referred to as a CB with RT.

  During the CB with RT, as described later, the reel control is performed so that the small role is prioritized over the replay and is drawn and aligned on the winning line, and as described above, the player can win any one of the predetermined small roles. Every game is controlled. For this reason, during the CB with RT, no winnings such as replays (2) to (6) that cause the RT to end occur, and the RT does not end during the CB. As a result, when the CB with RT is controlled, the control is continued to RT after that, regardless of whether 200 sheets are paid out or SB is won.

  Further, when the RT when the CB is generated is the RT with the navigation right, the navigation right is also maintained, so that the RT with the navigation right is controlled after the end of the CB. On the other hand, if the RT when the CB occurs is RT without navigation right, a navigation right grant lottery is performed every time the three-choice roles (1) to (3) are won, and navigation right is attached according to the result. It is controlled to RT or RT without navigation rights.

  Further, when the CB with RT is terminated by paying out 200 sheets, the navigation count is incremented by 10, and when the CB is terminated by SB winning, the navigation count is incremented by 5. Thus, when the CB with RT ends, a larger number of times of navigation is added than when the CB generated when it is not RT ends.

  As shown in FIG. 16, even when the navigation right is controlled to RT, when the number of times of navigation becomes 0 as a result of the navigation effect, the navigation right is lost and the navigation right is controlled to RT without navigation right. The

  Further, even if the navigation is controlled to the RT without navigation right, the navigation right grant lottery is performed every time the three alternative roles (1) to (3) are won, and the RT is controlled with the navigation right by winning. Is done. It should be noted that when the navigation right grant lottery is won in the RT without navigation right, a predetermined number of times of navigation may be added. In addition, the navigation right granting lottery during RT without navigation right may be configured to win with higher probability than during CB. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that the RT without navigation right is controlled to the RT with navigation right.

  SB is awarded when a combination of “red 7-star-star” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. When SB wins, the main control unit 41 shifts the gaming state to SB. The SB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role. SB ends in one game. As described above, the CB is completed by winning the SB in the CB. In addition, when the SB is ended during the initial gaming state or RT, and when the SB is finished, and when a special combination or replay (2) to (6) is won during the SB, the corresponding gaming state is entered. When the special role or replay (2) to (6) is not won in the SB, the game state before the SB win is entered.

  Next, a small role will be described. The three-choice combination (1) wins when a combination of “red 7-melon-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. The three-choice combination (2) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-melon-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. The three-choice combination (3) wins when a combination of “BAR-melon-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state.

  The symbols ("red 7", "white 7", "BAR") of the reel 2L constituting the three alternative roles (1) to (3) are each 7 frames as shown in the reel 2L of FIG. They are arranged so that the pullable ranges do not overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the “red 7” of the reel 2L that constitutes the 3-choice (1) indicates that the stop switch 8L is activated when the symbols 4 to 10 of the left reel 2L pass the lower stage. When the stop operation is performed, it becomes possible to draw into the winning line, and “white 7” of the reel 2L constituting the three-choice combination (2) is displayed when the symbols of the symbol numbers 0 to 3 and 18 to 20 of the left reel 2L pass through the lower stage. When the stop switch 8L is operated to stop, it can be drawn into the winning line, and the “BAR” of the reel 2L constituting the three-choice combination (3) is stopped when the symbols of the symbol numbers 11 to 17 of the left reel 2L pass through the lower stage. The symbols are arranged so that they can be drawn into the winning line when the switch 8L is stopped.

  On the other hand, the symbols ("melon") of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R constituting the three-choice combinations (1) to (3) are the maximum drawing range as shown in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R in FIG. They are arranged so that they can be pulled into the winning line regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switch.

  For this reason, even if each of the three choice combinations (1) to (3) is won in the internal lottery, the stop switch 8L must be operated at an appropriate timing at which the symbols constituting the selected three choice combination can be drawn. It can be said that it is a winning combination that cannot be won. The probability that the stop switch 8L can be operated at an appropriate timing at which the symbols constituting the winning three-choice combination can be drawn in the state where the winning three-choice winning combination is not recognized is ３.

  In this embodiment, during the RT with navigation right, when one of the three choice roles (1) to (3) is won, a navigation effect that can specify the type of the selected three choice roles is performed. .

  The player can recognize the winning of the three-choice combination and the type of the three-chosen winning combination according to the type of navigation effect. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to operate the stop switch 8L at an appropriate timing according to the type of the selected three-choice role, and it is possible to reduce the loss of the three-choice role during RT with navigation right. .

  Further, in the CB in which it is not determined that the navigation right is granted, the above-mentioned navigation right grant lottery is executed in response to winning of any of the three alternative roles (1) to (3). . In each game during the CB, as described above, the game is controlled so that it can win any one of the predetermined small combinations including the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) regardless of the stop operation timing. For this reason, during CB, the stop switch at the timing at which the symbols (“red 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”) constituting each of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) in the left reel 2L are stopped on the winning line. By stopping 8L, it is possible to win any of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) in each game. As a result, in every game in the CB where it is not determined that the right of navigation is given, expectation to win one of the three choice roles (1) to (3) and win in the navigation right grant lottery A feeling can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, during the RT without navigation right, the above-mentioned navigation right grant lottery is executed in response to winning of any of the three alternative roles (1) to (3). In addition, as described above, even in a state where the elected three-choice combination is not recognized, the elected three-choice combination can be won with a probability of 1/3. As a result, during the RT without navigation right, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning in the navigation right grant lottery by winning one of the three choice roles (1) to (3). Can improve the interest of

  A melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. The symbols constituting the melon (“melon”) are arranged within 7 frames in the left reel 2L, and are arranged within 5 frames in each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, as long as the melon is won, it can be said that as long as the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the melon can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A star is awarded when a combination of “star-melon-melon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. Of the symbols that make up the star, the “star” symbol on the left reel 2L is not placed within 5 frames, so if you do n’t operate the stop switch 8L at the right time to pull in the “star”, you will win. Even if it is, it can be said that it does not win a prize.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the star is controlled to RT by winning in the initial gaming state. In addition, when winning a star, it may be configured to add a predetermined number of times of navigation and control to RT with navigation right. Further, when a star is won, a navigation right grant lottery for winning with a higher probability than during CB may be performed, and the RT with navigation right or the RT without navigation right may be controlled according to the winning result. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the star in the initial gaming state and being controlled to the RT with navigation right.

  The strawberry (1) wins when the symbol “white strawberry” is derived in any of the winning lines for the left reel 2L in any gaming state. The strawberry (2) wins when the symbol “black strawberry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel 2L in any gaming state. The design of the left reel 2L composing the strawberry (1) (“white strawberry”) and the design of the left reel 2L composing the strawberry (2) (“black strawberry”) are each arranged within 7 frames on the left reel 2L. Since it is not done, it can be said that the winning combination will not be won even if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing at which the corresponding symbol can be drawn.

  When one of the above three choices (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) is won, ten medals are paid out. For these three choices (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2), in each game during the CB, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, a prize is won. It will be in a state that can. In this embodiment, in each game in the CB, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, three winning combinations (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) are won. Is permitted, that is, the winning flag is set. In addition, during CB, it is only necessary to be able to win three-choice roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) in each game, and the winning flag is set. For example, when it is during CB, it is won regardless of whether or not the winning flag is set for 3 choice roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2) The player may be in any winning state, such as performing the same control as when he / she is playing.

  A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. When winning a watermelon, 5 medals are paid out.

  A single winning combination is awarded when a combination of “white 7-star-star” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. When a single winning combination is won, one medal is paid out.

  The symbols constituting the watermelon ("Watermelon") and the symbols constituting the single sheet ("White 7" and "Star") are not arranged within 7 frames on each of the reels 2L to 2R. It can be said that if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing capable of drawing in, even if it is won, it will not be won.

  In addition, for a watermelon or a single winning combination, even if it is during CB, an internal lottery is performed according to a predetermined probability, and a winning can be made on the condition of winning. During the bonus, a predetermined number of the above-mentioned navigation times are added by winning a watermelon or one winning combination. 1 is added when a watermelon is won, and 3 is added when a winning combination is won.

  Next, the re-game player will be described. Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “red 7-banana-banana” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. Replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-banana-banana” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB.

  Replay (4) is awarded when a combination of “BAR-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. Replay (5) is awarded when a combination of “grape-banana-bananal” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. Replay (6) is awarded when a combination of “star-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than BB. When any one of the replays (1) to (6) wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again. This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  Further, when winning a replay (2) to (6) during RT, as shown in FIG. 16, the RT is terminated and controlled to the initial gaming state. For this reason, during RT, it is expected that the game progresses so that replays (2) to (6) do not win as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, during the RT with navigation right, when one of the replays (2) to (6) is won, a navigation effect that can specify the type of replay selected is performed. As a result, as will be described later, the player can perform a stop operation for avoiding the replays (2) to (6), and any of the replays (2) to (6) is performed during the RT with the navigation right. It is possible to intentionally avoid the end of the RT and the loss of navigation right after winning a crab.

  Next, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the acquired random numbers for internal lottery and each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value And it is performed according to the number of judgment values of the combination of combinations. In this embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each special combination, small combination, and re-playing combination, and multiple types of re-playing combination are selected and won. The range of determination values is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and multiple types of winning combinations may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, the small part and the special part or the replaying part and the special part are simultaneously elected as the lottery target part and duplicated so that the small part and the special part or the replaying part and the special part are won. A range of determination values to be won may be set, and multiple types of small roles may be simultaneously selected so that multiple types of small roles are also won in game states other than CB. A range of determination values that are read out as a lottery target combination and won in duplicate may be set.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target role in accordance with the game state of the initial game state, RT, special special carryover, BB, CB, and SB. The circles in FIG. 17 indicate that they are read out in the internal lottery in the corresponding gaming state, and the x marks indicate that they are not read out in the internal lottery in the corresponding gaming state. Also, the numerical value in parentheses below the ○ mark indicates the winning probability. Similarly, the winning probabilities not shown in FIG. 17 are set in advance for each set value 1 to 6, for example.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state and no special role is carried over, BB (1), BB (2), BB (3), CB (1), CB (2), CB (3) , CB (4), SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices (2), 3 choices (3), melon, star, Strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery. Note that, as shown in the lower column of FIG. 17, the replay GR (1) is a replay (1), a replay (2), a replay (4), and a replay (6) that are simultaneously read out as the internal lottery target roles. Replay GR (2) indicates that replay (1), replay (3), and replay (5) are simultaneously read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state and any special role is carried over, SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices A combination (2), three-choice combination (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT and no special role is carried over, as in the initial gaming state, BB (1), BB (2), BB (3), CB (1), CB (2), CB (3), CB (4), SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices (2), 3 choices (3), Melon, Star, Strawberry (1), Strawberry (2), Watermelon, and 1-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  In the state where the gaming state is RT and any special role is carried over, SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices ( 2) Three-choice combination (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  In this embodiment, the replay (1), replay GR (1), replay GR (2), 3 choice combination (1), 3 choice combination (2), 3 choice combination (3) winning probability in RT 2/3 of the winning 3 choice roles (1) to (3), excluding the 1/3 chance that can be won without knowing the winning, will be taken. In the case of spilling, the rate of grant per game (also referred to as payout rate), which is the ratio of the number of medals paid out as a result of the game to the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, is smaller than 1. As a result, the number of medals owned by the player will decrease, and if the selected three-choice roles (1) to (3) are won without being missed, the grant rate will be greater than 1 and the number of medals owned by the player will increase. Is set to

  When the above-mentioned RT with a navigation right is being performed, it is possible to win a winning combination without losing the selected three choices by executing the navigation effect, so the grant rate may be made larger than 1. it can. On the other hand, when it is during RT without navigation right, it is impossible to win without losing the 3 choices that the player has intentionally won, and as described above, it is possible to win without knowing the 3 choices won. Since the probability that it can be made is 1/3, the grant rate is smaller than 1. As a result, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation that the above-mentioned navigation right is granted and the number of times of navigation increases.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of the replay (1), replay GR (1), replay GR (2), 3 option combination (1), 3 option combination (2) and 3 option combination (3) during RT are as described above. Not limited to this, it may be set to a probability that the grant rate will be greater than 1, regardless of whether or not the elected three alternatives (1) to (3) are missed. Also in this case, when the RT with navigation right is in progress, it is possible to make a prize without losing the selected three-choice roles, so that the grant rate can be further increased.

  When the game state is BB, the 3 choice roles (1), 3 choice roles (2), 3 choice roles (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon It is sequentially read out as a target combination.

  When the game state is CB, SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices (2), 3 choices (3), melon, star, Strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery. When the game state is CB, as described above, regardless of the operation timing, the three-choice role (1), the three-choice role (2), the three-choice role (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2) It will be in a state where it can win a prize.

As described above, CB is ended by paying out 200 sheets or winning SB. The shortest number of games required for paying out 200 pieces is 20 games because the payout of a small role is 10 at the maximum. The SB winning probability is 1/15. For this reason, the probability of ending SB by winning 200 copies without winning SB is (1-1 / 15) ²⁰ , that is, about 25%, and the probability of ending SB during CB is about 75%. .

In addition, the probability that navigation right is granted during CB when SB is not won in CB and the process ends by paying out 200 cards and the winning probability in navigation right grant lottery is set to 1/10 is 1- [ It is about 88% which is (1-1 / 10) ²⁰ ]. That is, when 200 CBs are completed by paying out, the probability of being controlled to RT with navigation right is about 88%, and the probability of being controlled to RT without navigation right is about 12%. Therefore, unless the CB ends in the SB winning, the RT is controlled with a high probability of navigation.

  When the gaming state is SB, as in the initial gaming state, BB (1), BB (2), BB (3), CB (1), CB (2), CB (3), CB (4) , SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices (2), 3 choices (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), Strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery. When the game state is SB and any special role is carried over, SB, Replay (1), Replay GR (1), Replay GR (2), 3 choices (1), 3 choices A combination (2), three-choice combination (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2), watermelon, and one-sheet combination are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the combination or combination of roles to be subject to the internal lottery and the number of judgment values determined according to the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows It is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The winning flag indicating that a winning combination other than the big bonus or challenge bonus has been won is cleared regardless of whether or not the winning combination has been won, and the winning flag indicating that the big bonus or challenge bonus has been won will be cleared. It is maintained without being cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, when BB (1) + replay (1) is won and when BB (2) + replay (1) is won The same address is stored as the index data, and in such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Become.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the region number, and the region corresponding to each region number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is obtained by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and furthermore, one table creation data contains one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop situation (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and the reels are stopped. On the other hand, if no winning combination is selected, a stopping control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that does not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Note that a value of 0 to 1 is determined as the number of sliding frames of the left reel 2L in CB. Therefore, for the left reel 2L in the CB, it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of one frame symbol after detecting the stop operation, that is, including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. The stop position of the symbol can be specified from the range. A range of 0 to 4 frames when the gaming state is other than CB and a range of 0 to 1 frames of the left reel 2L when the game state is CB are each referred to as a maximum pull-in range.

  A specific example of the reel control performed according to the gaming state, the internal winning situation, the stop operation timing, the stop symbol, and the like will be described below.

  When special roles and small roles are won at the same time, such as when a special role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game (BB (1) + melon, CB (3) + strawberry (1) Etc.), the number of sliding symbols is set so that the selected small role is drawn into the winning line within the maximum drawing range, and the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line within the maximum drawing range Then, a stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so that the selected special combination is drawn into the winning line in the maximum drawing range is performed, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been elected in the maximum drawing range on the winning line, the control is performed so that they are stopped together. If the winning combination in the maximum drawing range cannot be withdrawn, and if the special combination winning in the maximum drawing range can be stopped on the winning line, control is performed to stop it. In this case, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is stopped within the maximum pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is withdrawn and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this example, if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, such as when the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, it will be elected more than the selected special role. The special role is controlled so that the special role is aligned on the winning line only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. However, if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, the special role is more special than the small role. Control for aligning the winning combination on the winning line is given priority, and control for aligning the small winning combination on the winning line may be performed only when the special winning combination cannot be drawn.

  If a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (BB (1) + replay (1), etc.), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game, When the stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped within the maximum drawing range on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals within the maximum pull-in range for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the maximum pull-in range Can always stop at any position, so if a special combination and a re-playing role are won at the same time, the re-playing must be done regardless of the timing of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. All the roles will be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special role and the replaying role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the replaying role is drawn in, and the special role is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the replaying role.

  When a plurality of types of re-game players are won at the same time (replay GR (1), replay GR (2)), the stop switch 8L for stopping the group of the selected re-game players and the left reel 2L is stopped. Control is performed to stop the re-gamer determined according to the operation timing from being drawn on the winning line within the maximum drawing range. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing re-playing combinations that are lined up on the winning line for each stop operation timing of the left reel 2L when the replay GR is won.

  For example, when replay GR (1) (replay (1), replay (2), replay (4), replay (6)) is selected, the stop operation timing of stop switch 8L is the left reel of FIG. When the symbols of symbol numbers 4 to 15 shown in 2L are passing through the lower stage, control is performed to stop any combination of replay (2), replay (4), and replay (6) in line with the winning line.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (1) is won, the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L is 0-3, 16-20 other than the symbol numbers 4-15 shown in the left reel 2L of FIG. When it is passing, control is performed so that the combination of replay (1) is aligned with the winning line and stopped.

  When replay GR (2) (replay (1), replay (3), replay (5)) is won, the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L is the symbol numbers 0 to 0 shown on the left reel 2L in FIG. When the symbols of 3, 16 to 20 are passing through the lower stage, control is performed to stop any combination of replay (3) and replay (5) on the winning line.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (2) is won, the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L is 4-15 symbols other than the symbol numbers 0-3 and 16-20 shown in the left reel 2L of FIG. When it is passing, control is performed so that the combination of replay (1) is aligned with the winning line and stopped.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay GR (1) is won, the player always wins one of the replay (1), the replay (2), the replay (4), and the replay (6). In addition, when the replay GR (2) is won, the player always wins one of the replay (1), the replay (3), and the replay (5).

  The stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L for avoiding the replays (2) to (6) and winning the replay (1) is the same as when the replay GR (1) is won and the replay GR (2). ) Is set differently from the time of winning and there is no overlapping timing. For this reason, unless it can be specified whether the player has won the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2), the player will intentionally win one of the replays (2) to (6). This is configured so that it cannot be avoided and control over the RT cannot be continued during the RT. Specifically, in a state where the type of the re-playing player group who has won is not recognized, the stop switch 8L is avoided so as to avoid winning in any one of the replays (2) to (6) and to win the replay (1). The probability of being able to operate is 1/2.

  On the other hand, when the player is in RT with navigation right, when the replay (2) to (6) is won, that is, when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won, A navigation effect that can specify the type of group is performed. Thereby, the player can specify the type of the group of the winning replay player and the winning replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) according to the type of the navigation effect. Therefore, the player operates the stop switch 8L at a timing for avoiding the replays (2) to (6) and causing the replay (1) to win according to the specified type of the re-playing role group. Is possible. As a result, during RT with navigation right, it is possible to avoid winning the replay (2) to (6) and ending the RT and losing navigation right.

  In addition, as a navigation effect to be executed when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won, a stop switch 8L for winning the replay (1) according to the type of the replaying player group selected. Information that can specify the stop operation timing is notified.

  In addition, even when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won during the RT without navigation right, the replay (2) has a probability of 1/2 without knowing the type of the group of the replaying player who has won. It is possible to avoid winning a prize in (6). In addition, during RT without navigation right, it is possible to win a 3 choice combination with a probability of 1/3 without knowing the type of the selected 3 choice combination, and a navigation right grant lottery is executed. For this reason, during the RT without navigation right, it is possible to provide an interest such as when to stop the stop switch 8L.

  It should be noted that, during the RT without navigation right, when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won, a predetermined notification effect for notifying that may be executed. Thereby, when the notification effect is executed, the player predicts which group of re-playing players has been won, and avoids winning the replays (2) to (6) according to the prediction. Therefore, the stop switch 8L can be stopped at the timing required, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  Further, during the RT without navigation right, when a three-choice role (1) to (3) that triggers the navigation right grant lottery is won, a predetermined notification effect for notifying that may be executed. Thereby, when the notification effect is executed, the player predicts which of the three choice combinations is won, and stops the stop switch 8L at a timing for winning the three choice combination according to the prediction. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, a specific example of reel control performed when a plurality of types of small combinations are simultaneously won in the CB will be described.

  For example, during CB, it becomes a state that can win 10 combinations of games, 3 choice roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2). In this case, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop the “red 7”, “white 7” and “BAR” constituting each of the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) on the winning line within the range of one frame, If none of “Red 7”, “White 7” and “BAR” can be stopped on the winning line, “Red 7” and “White 7” constituting each of melon, star, strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) "BAR", "melon", "star", "white strawberry", "black strawberry" are controlled to stop at the winning line. Further, with respect to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, control is performed to stop the common “melons” constituting the three alternative roles (1) to (3), the melons, and the stars in alignment with the winning line.

  As a result, among the three choice roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) in the CB, the three choice roles (1) to the opportunity for the navigation right grant lottery (3) is controlled so as to be drawn into the winning line and stopped in preference to other melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2). As a result, in each game in the CB, the rate of winning the three-choice roles (1) to (3) increases, the rate at which the navigation right grant lottery is executed can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the three choice roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) are 4 in the reel 2L in which the number of frames to be drawn in the CB is limited. The reels 2C and 2R are arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, the symbols constituting the three alternative roles (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2) are always used regardless of the stop operation timing of the corresponding stop switches 8L to 8R. It can be pulled into the winning line and stopped.

  However, if the other reels 2C and 2R are stopped before the left reel 2L, the three choices (1) of the left reel 2L are placed on the winning line where the “melon” in the reels 2C and 2R is stopped. ~ (3), the symbols constituting melon and star cannot be aligned and stopped, and there may be cases where winning cannot be achieved. For example, when the “melon” on the reels 2C and 2R stops on the upper pay line L2, and the stop switch 8L is stopped when the symbol “Grape” of symbol number 1 on the left reel 2L passes the upper stage. , "Grape" symbol and "banana" symbol arranged one frame away from each other are three alternatives (1)-(3), melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2) Therefore, there is a case where none of the small roles can be won.

  On the other hand, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the three choices (1) to (3) of the left reel 2L, melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2) regardless of the stop operation timing. Can be stopped on the winning line, and the “melon” symbols of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R can be aligned and stopped on the winning line.

  As described above, the CB in the present embodiment is a three-choice combination (1) to (3), melon, star, strawberry (which is a symbol combination that can be won regardless of the stop operation timing as long as the left reel 2L is first stopped. 1), a plurality of types of small roles such as strawberry (2), etc., are configured so that each game can be won. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the CB is configured to give a privilege such as performing an internal lottery for a watermelon, a single-piece role, etc., among the small roles that are missed, and adding the number of navigations when winning. ing.

  In addition, during the CB, as shown in FIG. 17, internal lottery is performed for five or one watermelon with one payout, one winning combination, etc., so that multiple types of small roles with different payout numbers win simultaneously. A state of obtaining can occur. In this case, control is performed such that a small combination having a large number of payouts, that is, a watermelon and a small combination such as a 3-choice combination in which the number of payouts is larger than a single combination is preferentially drawn into the winning line and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the watermelon and the one-piece combination are winning combinations that are awarded to the player such that the number of times of navigation is added by winning in the bonus. However, as described above, when a watermelon or a single winning combination is won during the CB, reel control is performed so that the 3 alternative winning combinations are preferentially drawn into the winning line, so the watermelon or single winning combination is won. It will be difficult for players to understand whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a watermelon or a single winning combination is won in the CB, reel control different from that when the watermelon or single winning combination is not won is performed. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of reel control during CB. For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, when a watermelon or one winning combination is won in CB, a small winning combination with a large number of payouts is preferentially drawn into the winning line, and “white” of the left reel 2L When the “strawberry” or “black strawberry” is drawn into the winning line, reel control is performed to stop the “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” in the middle stage in preference to the upper and lower stages.

  On the other hand, in the CB, if you do not win a watermelon or a single piece, draw a small role such as 3 choices into the winning line, and win the “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” on the left reel 2L. In the case of pulling in, the reel control is performed in which the “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” is stopped at the upper or lower level in preference to the middle level.

  As a result, depending on whether or not “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” on the left reel 2L is stopped in the middle stage, it is possible that a privilege such as winning a watermelon or one piece and adding the number of times of navigation is given. The person can be notified. For example, when the “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” of the left reel 2L stops in the middle stage, the player wins the watermelon or one-piece combination and adds the number of times of navigation than when stopped in the upper or lower stage It can be recognized that there is a high possibility that a privilege such as being played is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, during CB, as shown in FIG. 17, a state in which a plurality of types of small roles and SBs can win simultaneously may occur. In this case, the same reel control as that in the case where the above-mentioned special combination and small combination are won at the same time, that is, control for drawing in and stopping the winning combination with priority over the small combination is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the SB is a winning combination that ends the CB by winning in the CB. However, as described above, in a game in which SB is won during CB, reel control is performed so that the three-choice combination is preferentially drawn into the winning line as in CB, and the left reel 2L The number of frames to be drawn in is limited. For this reason, the player cannot specify that the SB has been won and that the CB has ended at the time when the game in which the SB is won in the CB ends.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when SB is won during CB, reel control different from that when SB is not won is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), when SB is won in CB, priority is given to 3 winning combinations and the like, and 3 winning combinations (1) to (3), melon In the case of drawing a star into the winning line, the three-choice (1) to (3), the melon, and the stars constituting each of the stars are given priority over the winning line L4 or L5 which is an oblique line. Reel control is performed to stop the pay lines L1 to L3.

  On the other hand, when the SB is not won in the CB, in the case where the three-choice role is preferentially drawn into the winning line, and the three-choice (1) to (3), melon and star are drawn into the winning line. Stops the winning symbols L4 or L5, which are diagonal lines, in preference to the winning lines L1-L3, which are horizontal lines, for the symbols constituting the three alternative roles (1) to (3), melon and star. Reel control is performed.

  As a result, in the CB, when the three-choice roles (1) to (3), melon and star are stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L3, than when they are stopped at the winning line L4 or L5, It is possible to make the player feel uneasy that the SB may have been won and the CB may have been terminated, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  During the CB, a bonus effect corresponding to the CB is executed as will be described later, but the bonus effect corresponding to the CB is continuously executed even after the SB is won and the CB ends. This makes it impossible to specify whether the CB has ended or not from the bonus effect, and allows the player to pay attention to the winning line where the three-choice roles (1) to (3), melon, and star are stopped. .

  Also, during the CB, as shown in FIG. 17, a state where a plurality of types of small roles and replaying roles can be won simultaneously, such as when replaying roles such as replays (1) to (6) are won. Can occur. In this case, a control is performed in which the small combination is given priority over the re-playing combination and is drawn into the winning line and stopped.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, a re-game player lottery is performed during CB. In particular, in the CB with RT, since the RT is repeatedly controlled while the RT is maintained, the player can win the re-gamer with high probability. On the other hand, CB ends by paying out 200 sheets, except for winning SB. For this reason, if in the CB, if a small combination and a re-playing combination can be won at the same time, a control is performed in which the re-playing combination is prioritized over the small combination and pulled into the winning line. There are inconveniences such as winning a re-game player without medal payout, increasing the game time during the CB, and increasing the probability that the CB is terminated by the SB winning.

  Therefore, in the CB in the present embodiment, when the small combination and the re-playing combination are won simultaneously, the reel control is performed so that the small combination is prioritized over the re-playing combination and pulled into the winning line and stopped. Has been. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), when the game state is other than CB, reel control is performed so that the re-playing role or small role is prioritized over the special role and drawn into the winning line and stopped. In some cases, reel control is performed in which a re-playing role is prioritized over a special role, and a small role is prioritized over a re-playing role, and is pulled into the winning line and stopped. As a result, in the CB, the winning of a small role with medal payout can be generated with the highest priority, the number of games to be digested in the CB can be reduced as much as possible, and the number of internal lotteries can be reduced as much as possible. The rate at which CB is terminated midway through SB winning can be reduced.

  Note that the case where a small combination and a re-playing combination are not won simultaneously when in a gaming state other than CB has been described. However, even in a gaming state other than CB, an internal lottery may be performed so that a small combination and a re-playing combination are won simultaneously. For example, you may comprise so that 3 choice combination (1) and replay (1) can be won simultaneously. In this case, when a small combination and a re-playing combination are won at the same time, the reels may be controlled with different priorities depending on whether or not the CB is being played. For example, when a small role and a re-playing role are simultaneously won during CB, reel control is performed so that the small role is prioritized over the re-playing role and pulled into the winning line and stopped. When the re-gamer is won at the same time, reel control may be performed in which the re-gamer is prioritized over the small role and is drawn into the winning line and stopped. As a result, for example, in a gaming state other than during the CB, the re-playing role is prevented from being missed and the gambling is kept moderate, while the number of games to be digested is reduced as much as possible by winning the small role as much as possible during the CB. The number of times that the internal lottery is performed can be reduced as much as possible, and the rate at which CB is terminated halfway through SB winning can be reduced.

  As described above, as a specific example of the reel control, the example in which the symbols constituting the winning winning combination are stopped on the winning line according to the gaming state, the internal winning situation, the stop operation timing, the stop symbol, and the like have been described.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbols constituting the winning winning combination cannot be stopped on the winning line, the reel control for stopping the symbols constituting the predetermined winning combination not winning on the winning line is further performed. Done. For example, during RT, when one of the three choice combinations (1) to (3) is won, the stop switch 8L stops at a timing at which the symbols constituting the selected three choice combination can be drawn. When the operation is performed, the symbol is stopped on the winning line, and when the stop operation is performed at a timing when the drawing cannot be performed, the reel control is performed so that the symbols constituting the three unselected winning combinations are pulled into the winning line and stopped.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the reel control executed when any of the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) is won and all the reels 2L to 2R are rotating. It is. FIG. 20 (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the stop operation timing and the priority symbol when the left reel 2L is first stopped, and FIG. 20 (b) shows that the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is the first. It is a figure which shows the relationship between stop operation timing when stopped, and a priority symbol.

  First, with reference to FIG. 20A, the relationship between the stop operation timing and the priority symbol when the left reel 2L is first stopped will be described. For example, when the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L is when the symbols of symbol numbers 4 to 10 are passing through the lower stage, “red 7” of symbol number 10 constituting the three-choice role (1) is drawn into the winning line and stopped. Control is performed, and when symbols of symbol numbers 0 to 3 and 18 to 20 are passing through the lower stage, control is performed to pull in and stop “White 7” of symbol number 3 constituting the three-choice role (2) into the winning line. When symbols of symbol numbers 11 to 17 are passing through the lower stage, control is performed so that “BAR” of symbol number 17 constituting the three-choice combination (3) is drawn into the winning line and stopped.

  Thus, when any of the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, any of the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) is configured. The symbol to be drawn is drawn on the winning line and stopped. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning the three-choice combination even after the first stop.

  In addition, when either the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the second time after the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time when any one of the three choices (1) to (3) is won. Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8C and 8R, the common “melon” that constitutes the three alternative roles (1) to (3) is configured as one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3). Reel control is performed so that the drawing is stopped on the winning line where the symbol is stopped (see the relationship in FIG. 20B described later). As a result, even after the second stop, it is possible to enter a three-choice winning tempering state that can win a three-choice winning combination according to the result of the subsequent third stop. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning the three-choice role until the third stop.

  Note that when the second stop is made and the three-choice winning combination is in the tempering state, the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R that is still rotating is stopped and the three-championing state that is in the tempering state is concerned. Is a three-choice winning combination, reel control is performed to pull in and stop the common “melon” constituting the three-choice (1) to (3) on the winning line where the tempering state is established. It is. On the other hand, when the three-choice combination that is in the Tempei state is a three-choice combination that is not won, the common “melon” that constitutes the three-choice combination (1) to (3) Reel control is performed to stop symbols on the winning line that are different from “melon” and do not generate a winning combination that is not won, so that the winning line is not stopped. As a result, when the winning three-choice combination is in a tempered state, the winning of the three-choice winning combination can be generated. On the other hand, when a three-choice combination that has not been won is in a tempered state, the winning of the three-choice combination can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20B, the relationship between the stop operation timing and the priority symbol when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is first stopped will be described. For example, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8C and 8R, control is performed to pull in and stop the common “melon” constituting the three alternative roles (1) to (3) into the winning line.

  As a result, when one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the three alternative roles (1) to (3) are changed. The composing common “melon” is drawn on the winning line and stopped. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning the three-choice combination even after the first stop.

  When the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time when one of the three choice combinations (1) to (3) is won, and the rotating left reel 2L is stopped for the second time. The symbols that make up one of the three choices (1) to (3) (any one of “Red 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR”) are drawn into the winning line where “Melon” is already stopped. When the reel control to be stopped is performed (refer to the relationship in FIG. 20A described later), and the reels that are still rotating among the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are second stopped, the three-choice (1) to (1)- The reel control is performed so that the common “melon” constituting (3) is drawn and stopped on the winning line where “melon” is already stopped. As a result, even after the second stop, it is possible to enter a three-choice winning tempering state that can win a three-choice winning combination according to the result of the subsequent third stop. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning the three-choice role until the third stop.

  It should be noted that when the second stop is in the three-choice winning tempering state, the reel that is still rotating is stopped, and the three-challenging in the tempering state is elected When the three-choice combination is selected, reel control is performed so that the symbols constituting the three-choice combinations (1) to (3) are drawn and stopped on the winning line where the tempering state is established. On the other hand, when the three-choice combination in the tempering state is a three-choice combination that is not won, the symbols constituting the three-choice combination (1) to (3) are displayed on the winning line where the tempering state is established. In order to prevent the winning combination from being stopped, the reel control is performed to stop the symbols that are different from the symbols constituting the three-choice combinations (1) to (3) and that do not generate a winning combination that is not won on the winning line. Done. As a result, when the winning three-choice combination is in a tempered state, the winning of the three-choice winning combination can be generated. On the other hand, when a three-choice combination that has not been won is in a tempered state, the winning of the three-choice combination can be prevented from occurring.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when one of the three choice roles is won, the sense of expectation that the third choice combination may be won after the first stop and the second stop is maintained. The reel control is performed so that it can be performed. For this reason, in particular, during the non-navigation-free RT, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that it may win a three-choice role that triggers the navigation right grant lottery until the third stop. Can be improved.

  Note that the reel control shown in FIG. 20 is not limited to the case where one of the three choice combinations (1) to (3) is won, and when any winning combination including the three choice combination is not won. Or when a predetermined winning combination (for example, strawberry (1), etc.) is won, but the symbols constituting the winning combination cannot be drawn into the winning line and stopped (that is, when they are missed) You may comprise as follows. Accordingly, it is possible to increase an opportunity for the player to have a sense of expectation that he may win a three-choice role that will trigger the navigation right grant lottery.

  Further, the reel control shown in FIG. 20 may be configured not only during RT but also in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation that he may win a three-choice role.

  Also, in FIG. 20, the symbols that can be drawn out of the symbols that constitute the three-choice role are awarded if the stop operation timing is such that the symbols that constitute the three-choice role can be drawn into the winning line within the maximum pull-in range. An example in which the line is stopped has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Among the stop operation timings in which symbols constituting the three-choice winning combinations can be drawn into the winning line within the maximum pull-in range and stopped, the symbols constituting the non-winning three-chosen predetermined stoppages. On the condition that it is the operation timing, the reel control as shown in FIG. 20 for drawing the symbols constituting the 3-choice combination into the winning line may be executed.

  For example, regarding the reel control of the left reel 2L when the three-choice combination (1) is won, when the stop operation timing of the stop switch 8L is when the symbols of the symbol numbers 4 to 10 are passing the lower stage, The control of drawing “Red 7” of symbol number 10 constituting (1) into the winning line is stopped, and the symbol constituting symbols 3 (2) when symbol numbers 0 to 3 are passing the lower stage. Control is performed to draw “White 7” of No. 3 into the winning line and stop, and when the symbols of Symbol Nos. 14 to 17 are passing the lower stage, the “BAR” of Symbol No. 17 constituting the three-choice role (3) is set. You may comprise so that it may control to stop drawing in to a winning line. Even in such a case, the expectation that a three-choice combination may be won can be maintained until the third stop, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols constituting the three-choice roles (1) to (3) is a common symbol for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, and different symbols only for the left reel 2L. An example was described. However, the following combinations may be used for the combinations of symbols constituting the three alternative combinations (1) to (3).

  The symbol for the left reel 2L and at least one symbol of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are of the same type (for example, “red 7-red 7-melon”, “white 7-white 7-melon”). Etc.). In this case, for the reel control of the reel having the same design as the design of the left reel 2L and the left reel 2L, a 3-choice combination that can be pulled in according to the stop operation timing is configured as in FIG. Reel control that draws and stops any of the symbols on the winning line is applied, and reel control similar to that in FIG. 20B is applied to reel control of the other reels. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may win a three-choice role.

  Further, the symbols for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are each composed of different types of symbols (for example, “red 7-melon-banana”, “white 7-melon-banana”, etc.). Also good. In this case, as in FIG. 20B, reel control is applied to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R to draw and stop the symbols constituting the three-choice combination on the winning line regardless of the stop operation timing. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may win a three-choice role.

  The left reel 2L is used as a specific reel for which reel control is performed to stop different types of symbols on the winning line among the symbols constituting the three-choice (1) to (3) according to the stop operation timing. It was described as an example. However, the specific reel is not limited to the left reel 2L but may be another reel (for example, the right reel 2R). Further, the specific reel is not limited to one reel and may be a plurality of reels. In this case, with respect to the reel control of a specific reel, as in FIG. 20A, the reel control that pulls and stops any of the symbols constituting the three alternatives that can be pulled in according to the stop operation timing on the winning line. Apply. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may win a three-choice role.

  As described above, on the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a prize is generated. It will be a thing. Depending on the progress of the game on the side of the game control board 40, the navigation effect described above is performed on the side of the effect control board 90 according to the progress of the game on the side of the game control board 40 in this way. Including original production. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. Various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In order to perform an effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 side ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, a game effect according to the game state and stage is provided as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92. is there.

  The game production is a demonstration production, a continuous production that informs whether or not the bonus is won, and after being informed that the bonus is won, it is drawn on the winning line with priority over the bonus. Replays or small roles that are controlled are not won, but it is a chance to win a bonus, and the small role is selected from symbols (or symbol combinations) that have been won for a small role but stopped on some reels. A chance effect that informs you that it is a chance timing that you can win a winning bonus that you can't win and win, and a bonus that runs from when the gaming state wins the bonus until it ends Production, navigation production performed during RT with navigation right, notification production performed during RT without navigation right, gaming state performance according to gaming state Including the. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM.

  The sub control unit 91 executes a game effect based on the game state command from the main control unit 41. The game effect is a predetermined mode (the color of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the appearing character, the sound effect / game sound output from the speakers 53, 54, the lighting pattern of the effect effect LED 52, etc.) are different. Is done.

  The game effect is controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When the production start command is received, if the production data is written in the production data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 for each frame in each frame period until the production end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each of a plurality of types of stages, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the stage at that time. Will be.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  Next, a process executed by the main control unit 41 and a process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  First, processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game processing one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the setting value work in the normal range is stored in the setting value work with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, the game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7, the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are also performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). In the BET process, a BET command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 every time a bet number is set.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Further, in the CB, the three alternative roles (1) to (3), the melon, the star, the strawberry (1), and the strawberry (2) are in a state that can win each game.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R starts and stops, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-mentioned role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that one of the winning combinations has been won, various processes corresponding to the winning generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the bonuses has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. When it is determined that a CB winning is made during RT, processing for controlling the CB while maintaining RT (for example, setting the value of CB with RT corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed. .

  In the winning determination process, when one of the replays (2) to (6) is won during RT, a process for controlling to the initial gaming state (for example, the value of the initial gaming state is set to the value of the gaming state flag). Are set). In the winning determination process, when a star is won during the initial gaming state, processing for controlling to RT (for example, setting the RT value as the gaming state flag value) is performed. In the winning determination process, when winning an SB, a process for controlling the SB for only the next one game is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. In addition, various processing not related to winning (for example, processing related to bonus termination control (including determination of establishment of bonus termination conditions) and winning flags that do not carry over (winning flags for re-playing roles, small roles, SB, etc.) Delete). Further, in the process related to the bonus end control, when the SB is won during the CB, a process for terminating the CB halfway is performed. In addition, in the process related to the bonus end control, at the end of BB or at the end of paying out 200 CBs generated during non-RT, a process for controlling to RT (for example, the RT value is set as the value of the game state flag). Etc.) are performed. Further, in the processing related to the bonus end control, when the CB with RT ends, the control is continued to RT. In the process related to the end control of the bonus, when the CB generated during non-RT is ended by the SB winning, the process for controlling to the initial gaming state (for example, the value of the initial gaming state is set to the value of the gaming state flag). Setting).

  In the payout process, the winning flag of BB or CB stored in the special work is not erased. As a result, the winning flag of BB or CB is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 performs the transition of the game state among the initial game state, RT, and bonus, and controls the command according to the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the substrate 90. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various effects such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 are performed. In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends. In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game effect execution process for executing the above-described game effect according to the game state or the like.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the navigation right granting process included in the game effect execution process, whereby the navigation right granting lottery is executed and the navigation right is given according to the lottery result. Granting a navigation right means, for example, setting a predetermined flag indicating that a navigation right is granted in the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91.

  In the navigation right granting process, a navigation right granting lottery is executed based on a command from the main control unit 41 when a predetermined flag is not set. There are multiple types of navigation right grant lots including, for example, winning one of the three choice roles in CB, winning one of the three choice roles in RT without navigation right, winning the star, etc. This is executed when any of the lottery conditions is satisfied. Note that the navigation right grant lottery may be performed so that the winning probabilities differ according to the type of the lottery condition that is established.

  Further, in the navigation right granting process, a navigation right is granted when BB ends based on a command from the main control unit 41. Further, in the navigation right granting process, when the number of times of navigation becomes 0, when RT is completed, or when the control is not controlled by RT after CB ends, the navigation right is lost and a predetermined flag is reset.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment executes a navigation effect by performing a navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process. In the navigation effect execution process, when a predetermined flag is set and a navigation right is granted, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of winning winning combination is executed based on a command from the main control unit 41.

  In the navigation effect execution process, when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won, the stop operation of the stop switch 8L for winning the replay (1) according to the type of the replaying player group selected. Information that can specify the timing is notified. For example, when the replay GR (1) is won, among the symbols included in the symbol numbers 0 to 3 and 16 to 20 for winning the replay (1), the character based on the black color that recalls “BAR” or When the effect using the background is executed and the replay GR (2) is won, among the symbols included in the symbol numbers 4 to 15 for winning the replay (1), the red color that recalls “red 7” An effect using the character or background is executed.

  Further, in the navigation effect execution process, when any of the three choice roles (1) to (3) is won, a navigation effect that can identify the type of the selected three choice roles is performed. For example, for example, when the three-choice role (1) is won, an effect using a character or background based on red that recalls “Red 7” is executed, and when the three-choice role (2) is won, A character or background based on a white color reminiscent of “White 7” is executed, and when a 3 choice role (3) is won, a character or background based on black color reminiscent of “BAR” is used. Production is performed.

  It should be noted that the navigation effect that is executed when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won, and the navigation effect that is executed when any of the above-described three alternative roles (1) to (3) is won. May be the same (different characters and backgrounds) or may be different.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment manages the number of times of navigation by performing the number of times of navigation management process included in the game effect execution process. Managing the number of times of navigation means, for example, adding or subtracting a predetermined count value indicating the number of times of navigation in the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91.

  In the navigation number management process, for example, 1 is added when the number of navigations is won for a watermelon in the bonus, and 3 is added when a single combination is won in the bonus, based on a command from the main control unit 41. .

  In the navigation count management process, the navigation count is incremented by 5 when BB (1) to (3) are completed based on a command from the main control unit 41, and 200 CBs are generated when not in RT. 5 is added when it is terminated by paying out, 10 is added when 200 CBs with RT are terminated by paying out, and 5 is added when CB with RT is terminated by SB winning.

  Further, in the navigation frequency management process, for example, 1 is subtracted when the navigation frequency wins the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) during the RT with navigation right based on the command from the main control unit 41. .

  As described above, the sub control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by performing the navigation right granting process, the navigation effect executing process, and the navigation frequency management process based on the command from the main control unit 41.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the interface (IF) board (main) 1100, and a test signal is sent from the test apparatus 1300 to the game. In addition to being input to the control board 40, a test signal generated in relation to the game result is output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300. The game control board 40 and the test apparatus By connecting 1300, it is possible to automatically perform a simulation test.

  FIG. 21 shows a test signal output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (main) 1100 and the game control board 40 from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (main) 1100. It is a figure which shows the signal for a test input.

  As shown in FIG. 21, an insertion request ramp signal, a start possible ramp signal, a BB in-progress signal, an RB game in-progress signal, a replay game in-progress signal, a first to third reel stop possible ramp signal, a first to third reel index signal, a payout Request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flag 1 to 4 signal, internal winning flag 5 to 8 signal, first reel motor excitation signal, second reel motor An excitation signal and a third reel motor excitation signal are output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 as test signals.

  Test signals output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 are output under the control of the main CPU 41a.

  The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and can specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

  The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start valid LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start valid LED 18 is lit, and can specify whether or not a game start operation is requested. .

  The BB in-progress signal, RB game in-progress signal, and replay game in-progress signal are signals indicating that the gaming state is BB, during RB, and during the replay game, respectively, and the gaming state at that time can be specified.

  The first to third reel stop enable lamp signals are signals indicating whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are driven, that is, whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are lit. It is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, middle reel, and right reel can be stopped.

  The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  The payout request signal is a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is being driven, and it is possible to specify that a medal payout operation is being performed.

  The payout count signal is a signal that is output every time a medal payout associated with winning is detected, and is a signal that causes the test apparatus 1300 to count the payout of medals.

The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.
The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are drive signals for the LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting values displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. .

  Each of the internal winning flags 1 to 4 is a 4-bit parallel signal, and the winning status of the general combination can be specified. In this embodiment, 0 (H) = losing, 1 (H) = replay (1), 2 (H) = replay (2), 3 (H) = replay (3), 4 (H) = replay (4 ), 5 (H) = Replay (5), 6 (H) = Replay (6), 7 (H) = 3 Option (1), 8 (H) = 3 Option (2), 9 (H) = 3 choices (3), 10 (H) = Melon, 11 (H) = Star, 12 (H) = Strawberry (1), 13 (H) = Strawberry (2), 14 (H) = Watermelon, 15 (H) = 1 indicates a winning combination.

  Each of the internal winning flags 5 to 8 is a 4-bit parallel signal, and the winning status of the special role can be specified. In this embodiment, 0 (H) = loss, 1 (H) = BB (1), 2 (H) = BB (2), 3 (H) = BB (3), 4 (H) = CB (1 ), 5 (H) = CB (2), 6 (H) = CB (3), 7 (H) = CB (4), 8 (H) = SB.

  The first to third reel motor excitation signals are drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the drive status of each reel can be specified. .

  As shown in FIG. 21, the insertion switch signal, reel start switch signal, first to third reel stop switch signal, payout switch signal, stop release switch signal, setting key switch signal, and setting switch signal are tested as test signals. Input from the device 1300 to the game control board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of the various switches and sensors provided in the slot machine 1, and these test signals are detected by the switch circuit 44 provided in the game control board 40, and are each detected by the main CPU 41a. Detection of a switch or sensor corresponding to the test signal is determined.

  The insertion switch signal is a signal corresponding to the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with connection terminals to which wiring from the IF board (main) 1100 can be connected, and test signals output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits are received. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the connection terminal and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch circuit 44 are formed. The wiring pattern is output from the main control unit 41 on which the main CPU 41a is mounted and various drive circuits. The test signal is output via the wiring pattern and the connection terminal, and the test signal input via the connection terminal and the wiring pattern is input to the switch circuit 44.

  In addition, the connection terminals are constituted by signal pins that can connect probes from the IF board (main) 1100 and connectors that can connect cables from the IF board (main) 1100. Thus, the wiring from the IF board (main) 1100 can be easily connected.

  The connection terminals are provided for the purpose of connecting the IF board (main) 1100 for convenience. The connection terminals for inputting / outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to game stores. This is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine. For this reason, the gaming control board 40 of the present embodiment has a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut to a state where an unnecessary signal cannot be input / output. This makes it easy to use test signals for purposes other than testing, such as detecting internal winning flag signals in hall equipment, identifying the winning status of the internal winning flag from the internal winning flag signal, and notifying the fact. Can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The number of slot machines provided for testing by a third-party organization is usually only a few. In addition, the slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores can input and output these test signals and test signals. Since it is less necessary to carry out, these mass production slot machines may be provided with the game control board 40 which is provided with the wiring pattern but is not provided with the above-described connection terminals. The manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced. Further, in this case, since a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF board (main) 1100 and the test apparatus 1300 can be easily configured only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect to. Also, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal, and a connection terminal for connection with the IF board (main) 1100 and the test apparatus 1300. In the slot machine for mass production, It is good also as a structure which does not provide these wiring patterns and connection terminals. That is, the main CPU 41a controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  Next, input / output states of test signals and test signals between the game control board 40 and the test apparatus 1300 during the test will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, first, when a medal can be inserted, the insertion request LED 17 is turned on, the insertion request lamp signal is turned ON, and an output request for the insertion switch signal is made to the test apparatus 1300. Based on this, the insertion switch signal is input from the test apparatus 1300, and the game can be started by detecting the insertion switch signal for a specified number corresponding to the gaming state. The enable lamp signal is turned ON, and the test apparatus 1300 is requested to output a reel start switch signal. Also, when performing a test, the use of credits is prohibited, so that the insertion of a medal cannot be performed by detecting a predetermined number of insertion switch signals, the insertion request LED 17 is turned off, and the insertion request lamp signal is turned OFF. To. Along with this, the closing switch signal is also stopped.

  When the reel start switch signal from the test apparatus 1300 is detected, the startable LED 18 is turned off and the startable lamp signal is turned OFF. And an internal lottery process is performed and the output state of the internal winning flag signals 1-4 and 5-8 is updated based on the result.

  Thereafter, when the reel starts to rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the left, middle, and right valid stop LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are turned on, and the first Turn on the 3 reel stop possible lamp. Based on this, any one of the first to third reel stop switch signals is input from the test apparatus 200, and when one of the first to third reel stop switch signals is detected, the left, middle, and right effective stop The corresponding LED among the LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R is turned off, and the corresponding first to third reel stop possible lamps are turned off. Then, after controlling the reels corresponding to the detected first to third reel stop switch signals, the effective stop LED corresponding to the rotating reel is turned on again, and the corresponding reel stop possible lamp is turned on. To do.

  When these processes are repeatedly performed and all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol combination is stopped. If the symbol combination accompanied by the medal payout is determined, the hopper motor The drive signal 34b is output, the payout request signal is turned ON, and a payout switch signal output request is made. Accordingly, a payout switch signal is input from the test apparatus 1300. By detecting the payout switch signal, the number of payout medals is counted, and payout switch signals for the number corresponding to the combination of winning symbols are displayed. When detected, the output of the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is stopped and the payout request signal is turned OFF. Accordingly, the input of the payout switch signal is also stopped.

  Next, when the gaming state changes according to the combination of symbols, after the driving signal of the hopper motor 32 is stopped, that is, after the payout request signal is turned off, the output state of the test signal indicating the gaming state is changed. For example, when a combination of BB (1), BB (2), and the like is prepared and the BB is shifted to BB, the BB signal is changed from OFF to ON. Thereafter, when the medal can be inserted again, the insertion request LED 17 is turned on, and the insertion request lamp signal is turned ON.

  A simulation test is automatically performed by exchanging the test signal and the test signal between the slot machine and the test apparatus 1300. The test apparatus 1300 performs the test as a result of these tests. It is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times when the payout count signal is detected during the period to be tested (the number of medals to be paid out) to the number of times the insertion switch signal is output during the period to be tested (the number of medals consumed) is calculated. The result (consumption number / payout number) is output as the payout rate.

  In recent years, it is possible to align the winning roles on the condition that an operation that satisfies the winning conditions has been performed, and by notifying the winning conditions, the payout rate is higher than when there is no notification of winning conditions. There is also a slot machine. In such a slot machine, the payout rate in the test and the payout rate in the market are different, and the test cannot be performed accurately. By outputting the indicated test signal, the test device can perform the test in a form close to that the player actually plays in the market, and the payout rate by the test can be made as close as possible to the market payout rate. Such a slot machine has been proposed.

  However, recently, the operation procedure as a winning condition is not clearly notified, and even if the same notification content is given, a different operation procedure is indicated by taking into account the player's preliminary knowledge (for example, as in this embodiment) When the replay GR (1) including the replays (2) to (6) or the replay GR (2), which will end the RT, is arranged at the timing of winning the replay (1) by the navigation effect. An effect reminiscent of the symbol is informed, but how to stop if it is not known that it is recommended that the stop operation is aimed at the symbol of the left reel 2L recalled from the informed effect. It is not possible to specify whether or not the operation is to be performed). And the payout ratio and the market of the payout rate there was a problem arises in that the divergence.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 21, the effect control board 90 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (sub) 1200, and the main CPU 41 a is controlled from the effect control board 90. The most recommended operation procedure that the player can select according to the current gaming state (including the gaming state specified from the gaming state command and the internal winning situation specified from the internal winning command) and the presentation mode by the sub CPU 91a The test signal indicating the operation procedure to be performed can be output.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a test signal output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (sub) 1200.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a stop execution position signal, a stop reel designation signal, a stop strobe signal, and a game interruption signal are output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 as test signals.

  Test signals output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 are output under the control of the sub CPU 91a.

  The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and effect mode, and the corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 167) of the reel motor can be specified.

  The stop reel designation signal is a signal that designates whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel. The reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied can be specified.

  The stop strobe signal is a signal for requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

  The game interruption signal is a signal for requesting a temporary interruption of the test by the test apparatus 1300, and is a signal that is output when prompting selection of an effect mode or the like by a manual operation.

  In the present embodiment, the production control board 90 is provided with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF board (sub) 1200 can be connected, and test signals output from the sub control unit 91 and various drive circuits are received. Wiring patterns for transmitting to the connection terminals are formed, and test signals output from the sub control unit 41 on which the sub CPU 91a is mounted and various drive circuits are output via these wiring patterns and connection terminals. ing.

  In addition, since the connection terminal is constituted by, for example, a signal pin to which a probe from the IF board (sub) 1200 can be connected and a connector to which a cable from the IF board (sub) 1200 can be connected, these connection terminals are Thus, the wiring from the IF substrate (sub) 1200 can be easily connected.

  The connection terminals are provided for the purpose of connecting the IF board (sub) 1200, and the connection terminals for outputting these test signals are the effects of the slot machine shipped to the amusement store. The control board 90 is not necessary. For this reason, the production control board 90 of this embodiment is formed with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut to a state where an unnecessary signal cannot be input / output. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the test signal from being easily used for purposes other than the test, such as specifying a recommended operation procedure in the hall device and notifying the fact. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the effect control board 90.

  It should be noted that the number of slot machines provided for testing by a third-party organization is usually about several units, and other mass-production slot machines shipped to amusement stores are less likely to output these test signals. Therefore, these mass production slot machines may be provided with the effect control board 90 which is provided with the wiring pattern but is not provided with the above-described connection terminals, thereby making it possible to manufacture the mass production slot machine. Can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal to the effect control board 90 is formed, the IF board (sub) 1200 and the test apparatus 1300 can be easily connected only by mounting the connection terminals. Is possible. In addition, a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal only to the test slot machine and a connection terminal for connecting to the IF board (sub) 1200 and the test apparatus 1300 are provided. It is good also as a structure which does not provide a connection terminal. In other words, the sub CPU 91a controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the sub CPU 91a has a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main CPU 41a outputs a reel start switch signal (actually, when the sub CPU 91a receives an internal winning command indicating the start of the game from the main CPU 41a). In the meantime, according to the current gaming state (the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command received at the end of the previous game, the internal winning situation indicated by the internal winning command), the production mode (the production mode of the game by the sub CPU 91a), The stop reel designation signal is updated to an output state indicating a recommended reel as the first stop reel, and the stop execution position signal is updated to an output state indicating a recommended stop operation position for the reel. After the update of the stop execution position signal is completed, the stop Outputs over blanking signal, the first stop reel and its stop operation position recommended notified to the test device 1300, after the stop of the stop strobe signal, a predetermined time (50 ms) to wait. Then, in the same procedure, the second stop reel and its stop operation position that are recommended in sequence are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has elapsed. That is, according to the recommended stop order, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position are sequentially notified to the test apparatus 1300, so that the test is performed. The operation procedure recommended by the apparatus 1300 can be specified.

  The ROM 91b stores a recommended operation procedure table in which recommended operation procedures are registered in advance according to the current game state and effect mode, and the sub CPU 91a stores an operation procedure that matches the current game state and effect mode. Obtained from the recommended operation procedure table and outputting a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal based on the obtained operation procedure. Note that the recommended operation procedure table registered in advance may not be provided, and the recommended operation procedure may be acquired using a program in which the sub CPU 91a determines the recommended operation procedure from the gaming state and effect mode at that time.

  In this embodiment, when the replay GR (1) and the replay GR (2) are won during the RT with navigation right, the stop operation position for winning the replay (1) (see FIG. 18, for example, the replay GR ( 1) When winning, a stop execution position signal indicating the symbol “BAR” of symbol number 17 of the left reel 2L is output.

  Further, in the RT with navigation right, when one of the three choice roles (1) to (3) is won, a stop operation position for winning the selected three choice roles (see FIG. 18, for example, the three choice roles) (1) When winning, a stop execution position signal indicating the symbol “red 7” of symbol number 10 of the left reel 2L is output.

  Thus, during the RT with navigation right, a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is acquired, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired stop operation procedure are output to the test apparatus 1300. In the test apparatus 1300 side, for example, when the RT with navigation right is being executed, the reel stop is performed in such a manner as to show a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player without ending the RT and not losing the winning three-choice combination. The switch signal can be output, and a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

  Further, during CB, in order to prevent the inconvenience of missing the winning combination, a stop reel signal indicating that the left reel 2L is stopped first is output.

  Thereby, during the CB, a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is acquired, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired stop operation procedure are output to the test apparatus 1300. On the 1300 side, for example, it is possible to output a reel stop switch signal in a manner that indicates a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player without missing a winning combination that makes it possible to win a game every time. By testing, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained.

  In addition, in a state where the right to navigate is not granted, the player cannot specify the result of the internal lottery, and the predetermined stop operation position (a stop operation position that minimizes the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting). A stop operation position signal indicating a stop operation position based on the law, a stop operation position based on the KKK striking method, and the like.

  For example, it is conceivable that a player who cannot specify the result of the internal lottery usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and you have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared to an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  In a state where no navigation right is given, a stop execution position signal indicating an arbitrary stop operation position (such as a stop operation position based on so-called father hitting) may be output. This is because it is conceivable that the player can proceed with the game without looking forward in consideration of speeding up the progress of the game. In this case, for the left reel 2L, for example, a stop execution position signal indicating the symbol “BAR” of symbol number 17 may be output.

  Thereby, even when the right of navigation is not granted, the stop operation procedure that the player may actually adopt is acquired, and the stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired stop operation procedure are obtained as a test apparatus. Since it is output to 1300, it becomes possible to output a reel stop switch signal in a manner indicating a stop operation procedure that the player may actually adopt on the test apparatus 1300 side, and the test by the test apparatus 1300 Thus, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, a signal that can specify the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300. Even when the number of symbols and the number of steps assigned to one symbol differ depending on the type of slot machine, the test apparatus 1300 can share the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal.

  In this embodiment, after the game is over, the timing at which the insertion of a medal is first detected, the timing at which the start operation is detected after the start operation is enabled, the timing at which the stop operation is performed, and the touch panel The sub CPU 91a outputs a game interruption signal to the test apparatus 1300 to request a temporary interruption of the test when the operation mode of the operation means such as the operation shifts to a state in which the effect mode or the effect mode can be changed. It is like that.

  For example, the stop execution position of the third stop reel when the presentation mode and the presentation mode can be changed by the operation of the presentation operating means after the game is finished, or after the game is finished. When the game stop signal is output after the completion of the output of the signal and the stop reel designation signal, and the effect mode and effect mode can be changed at the timing when the start operation is detected, after the game is finished, before the start operation becomes effective If the effect mode or effect mode can be changed by operating the effect operating means during the rotation of the reel, or when the stop operation is performed, or after the start operation is detected, the reel A game interruption signal is output before the stop operation becomes effective.

  As a result, even if the simulation test is automatically performed by the test apparatus 1300, when the effect mode or effect mode can be changed by manual operation, the game interruption signal is output, Is temporarily interrupted, and it is possible to restart the test after selecting the production mode and production mode by manual operation. For example, the small role notification production and the falling role type notification are executed by the production mode and production mode. Even if the frequency changes or the payout rate changes accordingly, it is not the payout rate obtained by chance and the play mode selected by chance during the automatic test, but the play mode or play mode. An accurate payout rate according to the difference can be obtained.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the CB in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 and the like, the three choice roles (1) to (3 ), Melon, star, strawberry (1), strawberry (2) can be won every game, and the number of times of navigation is added when winning a watermelon or one of the small roles in which the player misses. Thereby, whether or not the number of times of navigation can be added can be changed depending on the watermelon in the game in the CB and the internal winning situation of the single player. As a result, the interest of the game in CB can be improved.

  Even during a big bonus, the number of times of navigation is added when a watermelon or one winning combination is won out of small combinations that are missed. As a result, it is possible to compensate for a loss in the case of missing a watermelon or a single piece.

  (1-2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19A, different reel controls are performed depending on whether or not a watermelon or a single winning combination is won during CB. As a result, the possibility that a privilege such as winning a watermelon or one-piece combination and adding the number of navigations is given depending on whether “white strawberry” or “black strawberry” on the left reel 2L is stopped in the middle stage. It is possible to improve the interest of games in CB.

  (1-3) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 15, the number of times of navigation to be added differs depending on whether or not a watermelon is won in the bonus. As a result, it is possible to give interest to whether to win either a watermelon or a single winning combination, and to improve the interest of the game during the bonus.

  (1-4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, when a CB is won during RT, control to RT is continued in CB, that is, controlled to CB with RT. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the control to RT is terminated due to the CB winning. In addition, when RT ends due to CB winning, there is a risk of imposing the player the trouble of proceeding the game so as not to win CB, but in this embodiment, such a wasteful burden is imposed. Is not imposed on the player.

  Further, when a BB winning is made during RT, the control to RT is terminated and the BB is controlled. However, after the BB is finished, since it is always controlled to RT, the player is not burdened with the trouble of proceeding the game so as not to win the BB.

  (1-5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), in addition to the CB, the replaying role is changed to a winning combination other than the replaying role (for example, a special role, a replaying role, Reel control for drawing in to the winning line is performed in preference to the small combination (including the small combination when the small combination can be won simultaneously). On the other hand, during the CB, reel control is performed in which the small combination is preferentially drawn to the winning line over the re-game combination. For this reason, the number of games required from the start of control to CB to the end of paying out 200 pieces can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of games in which the internal lottery for the bonus is actually performed per unit time.

  (1-6) In the RT with navigation right in the above-described embodiment, when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) including the replays (2) to (6) serving as the RT end trigger is won. When the three winning combinations (1) to (3) are won, a navigation effect including information for specifying the type of the winning winning combination is executed. Thus, for example, the replay (2) to (6) can be stopped to avoid winning and the RT can be continuously controlled, and the stop operation is performed so as not to miss the selected three-choice role. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (2-1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, the reels 2L to 2R are selected when one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) is won. When all of them are rotating, when the stop switch 8L is operated at a stop operation timing that draws and stops the symbols constituting the three selected winning combinations on the winning line, the selected three winning combinations are displayed. Reel control is performed to pull in and stop the constituent symbols on the winning line, and the stop switch is activated at the stop operation timing to pull in and stop the symbols constituting the three alternatives of a different type from the selected three alternatives. When 8L is operated, reel control is performed to draw and stop the symbols constituting the three-choices of a different type from the currently selected three-choice on the winning line. As a result, when one of the three choice roles (1) to (3) is won and all the reels 2L to 2R are rotating, the stop switch 8L is operated and the symbol of the left reel 2L is operated. At the stage of stopping, the expectation for winning one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) can be maintained, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (2-2) In the embodiment described above, when any of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) is won and the left reel 2L is first stopped, the middle reel 2C and Even when one of the right reels 2R is stopped, reel control is performed in which a common "melon" symbol constituting the three-choice combination is drawn onto the winning line and stopped so as to be in a tempered state. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3) until the final stop.

  (2-3) In the embodiment described above, the reel control shown in FIG. 20 is performed even when any winning combination including the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) is not won. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of maintaining a sense of expectation for winning one of the three choice roles (1) to (3).

  (2-4) In the above-described embodiment, even when the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are stopped for the first time before the left reel 2L, the common “melon” constituting the three-choice combination Since reel control for drawing and stopping the symbols on the winning line is performed, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for winning one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3).

  (2-5) In the CB in which the navigation right is not granted or the RT without navigation right in the above-described embodiment, the navigation is performed by winning one of the three alternative roles (1) to (3). It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the right-giving lottery is executed and the right of navigation is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2-6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the sub-control unit 91 won the RT without terminating the RT as a test signal in the RT with navigation right 3 A stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating a stop operation procedure that is advantageous for a player who does not miss the winning combination are output to the test apparatus 1300. For this reason, the test apparatus 1300 can output a reel stop switch signal in a manner indicating a stop operation procedure that does not end the RT and does not miss the selected three-choice combination. Thus, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained.

  (3-1) In the above-described embodiment, the probability that the navigation right is given after the CB ends can be varied depending on whether the CB ends by winning the SB or by paying out 200 sheets. Specifically, in the case where the SB is not won in the CB and the game is ended by paying out 200 sheets, and the winning probability in the navigation right grant lottery is set to 1/10, the probability that the navigation right is granted in the CB is about 88. On the other hand, when the SB is won in the CB without RT different from the CB with RT, the probability that the navigation right is given is 0%. That is, the probability that the right to navigation can be given can be changed according to the SB winning situation in the game during CB. As a result, the interest of the game in CB can be improved.

  (3-2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, different reel control is performed in CB depending on whether or not SB is won. As a result, SB is elected depending on whether the three-choice roles (1) to (3), melon, or star are stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L3, or stopped at any of the winning lines L4 or L5. It is possible to estimate the possibility that the cage CB has been terminated halfway, and to improve the interest of the game during the CB.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the slot machine according to the above-described embodiment, in the CB, by performing different reel control depending on whether or not a watermelon or one piece combination is won, the number of times of navigation is added by winning the watermelon or one piece combination. Although the example which can guess the possibility that the privilege of giving was given was demonstrated, you may comprise so that the following structures may be provided instead of or in addition to this.

  For example, the sub-control unit 91 is configured so that a winning game notification effect for notifying that a watermelon or a single winning combination has been won is executed as a game effect in a game of winning a watermelon or one winning combination in the CB. Also good. Thereby, it can be notified in real time that the number of times of navigation has been won by winning a watermelon or one winning combination, and the interest of each game in the CB can be improved. The winning game notification effect is not limited to notifying that a watermelon or one winning combination has been won, but may be a notification of the added number of times of navigation, or a notification of the number of times of navigation after the addition. It may be.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a counting process for counting the number of winnings won for a watermelon or one winning combination after the CB starts, and a winning number notifying effect for notifying the number of winnings when the CB ends. You may comprise so that it may be performed as a game production. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for how many times a watermelon or one winning combination has been won since the start of CB, and to win more times, and to improve the interest of games during CB be able to.

  In addition, the winning number notification effect is not limited to notifying the number of winnings won for each watermelon or one combination, but may be a notification of the total number of navigations added during the current CB by winning. In addition, the number of times of navigation after the addition may be notified. In the counting process, for example, in the RAM 91c, by adding and updating the count value provided for each type of watermelon or one sheet combination, the number of wins for each watermelon or one sheet combination is counted, and each time CB ends. Reset to.

  Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 91 wins a CB, the aspect of the effect of notifying the information regarding the watermelon winning or single winning combination during the CB is the above-described winning game notification effect or the winning number notification effect. May be configured to set. Whether to make a winning game notification effect or a winning number notification effect may be configured to be selected by the player via the operating means, or may be configured to be randomly selected using a random number. Good. Thereby, it can be made to notice in which aspect the information regarding a watermelon winning or single winning combination is notified every time a CB is won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 16, when a CB generated during non-RT is terminated by SB winning, the RT is not controlled after that and the right of navigation is not granted. explained. However, even when the CB generated during the non-RT is terminated by the SB winning, it may be configured to control to RT. For example, the reel control may be performed so that the symbol combination for RT transition is always stopped on the winning line only when SB is won. Thereby, by winning the SB in the CB, the CB is terminated halfway, but the symbol combination for the RT transition is stopped on the pay line, so that it can be controlled to the RT thereafter.

Even in the case of such a configuration, the probability that the navigation right is granted after the end of the CB can be made different depending on whether the CB is ended by the SB winning or the 200 sheets are paid out. This is because the probability that the navigation right is granted when the navigation right granting lottery is executed in response to the three-choice winning combination is proportional to the number of games consumed by the CB. For example, in the case where the SB is not won in CB and the game is terminated by paying out 200 sheets, and the winning probability in the navigation right granting lottery is set to 1/10, the probability that the navigation right is granted in the CB is about 88%. On the other hand, when the SB is won in the 10th game after being controlled by the CB, the probability that the navigation right is given to the CB is 1-[(1-1 / 10) ¹⁰ ], which is about 65. %. It can be said that as the SB is won earlier in CB, the number of times the navigation right grant lottery is performed is reduced, and the probability that the navigation right is granted is reduced. Therefore, the probability that the right of navigation is given can be changed according to the SB winning situation in the game during CB, and as a result, the interest of the game during CB can be improved.

  As described above, when the CB generated during the non-RT is terminated by the SB winning and the control is made to the RT, when the CB generated during the non-RT is terminated by paying out 200 sheets. The RT may not be controlled, and the navigation right may be lost when the navigation right is granted. When configured in this way, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning the SB in each game in the CB, and to improve the interest of the game in the CB.

  Further, when the CB generated during the non-RT is terminated by the SB winning, when it is configured to control to RT, the navigation right grant lottery may be executed by winning the SB. . As a result, since the navigation right grant lottery is executed by the SB winning as the CB end opportunity, even if the CB is terminated halfway, it is expected that the navigation right may have been granted in the SB winning game. Can be held by a person.

  Furthermore, in this case, a plurality of types of SBs that trigger CB termination are provided, and the winning probability that the right of navigation is given in the navigation right grant lottery executed in the SB winning game varies depending on which type of SB is won. You may do it. Thereby, in CB, it can be made to be interested in which kind of SB was elected among several types of SB, and the interest of the game in CB can be improved.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the winning probability by which a navigation right is provided by a navigation right provision lottery may differ with the kind of said navigation right provision lottery execution opportunity. For example, the navigation right grant lottery may be executed according to different winning probabilities depending on which of the three choice combinations (1) to (3) is won. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to which opportunity is established as a navigation right grant lottery opportunity, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (3) In the CB of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of small combinations including the three alternative combinations (1) to (3) are set in a state where each game can be won, regardless of the stop operation timing. An example in which one of the plural types of small combinations can be awarded has been described. However, the state in which a small combination can be won regardless of the stop operation timing is, for example, a state where one type of small combination that can be drawn into the winning line regardless of the stop operation timing can be won every game even in CB. You may comprise so that it may consist of. In addition, while in the CB, an explanation has been given of an example in which a small role that is ready to win a game cannot be awarded depending on the stop order of the reels 2L to 2R, and a case where it is missed may be missed. Regardless of the order in which the reels 2L to 2R are stopped, it may be configured such that a small role can be always won. In addition, during the CB, it may be configured such that a small role winning can always be awarded regardless of the stop operation timing and stop operation order of the stop switches 8L to 8R. Even when configured in this way, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (4) The example in which the number of times of navigation in the above-described embodiment is decremented every time the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won in the RT with navigation right has been described. However, the number of times of navigation may be configured such that 1 is subtracted even when the three alternative roles (1) to (3) are won during RT with navigation right.

  Further, the number of times of navigation may be configured to be decremented by 1 every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5) after being controlled by the RT with navigation right. In this case, when the replay GR (1), the replay GR (2), and the three alternative roles (1) to (3) are won during the predetermined number of games, the corresponding navigation is not subtracted without subtracting the number of navigations. Production is performed.

  In addition, when control to RT with navigation right is started, it is determined whether the subtraction opportunity of the number of times of navigation is subtracted every time a predetermined winning combination is won or subtracted every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times, You may comprise so that a navigation effect may be performed in the said RT with navigation right by this determined subtraction method. This makes it possible to focus on which subtraction method is used to subtract the number of times of navigation every time the RT is controlled with the navigation right, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, an example in which a privilege such as adding the number of times of navigation is given by winning a watermelon or a single combination during a bonus has been described. As a privilege by doing, it is not limited to the addition of the number of times of navigation, for example, execution of navigation right grant lottery, control to a state advantageous to the player such as RT after the bonus ends, grant of navigation right, execution of premium production, etc. Anything may be used as long as it enhances the interest of the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a privilege such as performing a navigation right grant lottery is awarded by winning the three alternative roles (1) to (3) has been described. The benefits of winning a prize in (3) are not limited to the execution of the navigation right grant lottery, but include games such as adding the number of times of navigation, controlling to a state advantageous to the player such as RT, giving the right of navigation, and executing premium effects. Anything may be used as long as it enhances the interest of the person.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the RT controlled on the condition that the bonus has ended is terminated by winning one of the replays (2) to (6) or until the bonus is terminated. An example of continuous control has been described. Furthermore, the RT controlled on the condition that the bonus has ended is configured to be terminated when the symbol combination corresponding to the specific winning combination is stopped and controlled to an advantageous state more advantageous than the RT. Also good. This advantageous state is, for example, controlled to an advantageous RT in which the probability of winning the replay (1) is significantly higher than when RT is selected, and even if, for example, three choices are missed, the grant rate is greater than 1. You may comprise as follows. Also, the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination may be, for example, a symbol combination of a specific type of small role, and a specific symbol that can be stopped only when a specific type of small role is won. It may be a combination, or may be a special replay symbol combination that can be won internally with a higher probability than in the initial gaming state when in RT.

  In the above-mentioned advantageous state, a combination of ending symbols that can be stopped only when a predetermined number of games are consumed, a bonus winning or winning, or a winning combination for ending a predetermined advantageous RT is stopped is stopped. For example, the control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Then, when this advantageous state is completed after a predetermined number of games have been consumed, it may be configured to control to RT again. That is, during the RT, the replays (2) to (6) are prevented from winning a prize, and the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination is stopped, thereby controlling the advantageous state more advantageous to the player. Unless the bonus winning or winning is won or the combination of the symbols for termination is not stopped, the RT and the advantageous state can be looped by controlling again to RT.

  In this case, if the RT controlled on the condition that the bonus has ended is the RT with navigation right, the replay GR (1), the replay GR (2), and the three choice roles (1) to (3) are won. In addition to executing a navigation effect at the time, when a specific winning combination that triggers an advantageous state is won, information for specifying that the specific winning combination is won is notified. You may comprise so that a navigation effect may be performed.

  Also, in the case of an advantageous state controlled by stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination during RT, regardless of whether the right to navigate or the number of times of navigation remains. It may be configured to execute a navigation effect that informs information for specifying the type of the selected combination when winning a small combination including three selection combinations and a winning combination for ending advantageous RT. . As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for controlling to RT with navigation right after the bonus ends, granting the right to navigation, and adding more navigation times. Can be improved.

  Further, in an advantageous state, for example, by winning a predetermined winning combination such as a watermelon or a single winning combination, the number of navigations may be added according to the type of winning winning combination. This can further improve the degree of advantage for the player during the advantageous state.

  (7) When the RT in the above-described embodiment is an RT with a navigation right, it corresponds when at least three alternative roles (1) to (3), replay GR (1), and replay GR (2) are won. The example which performs the navigation effect to perform was demonstrated. However, the RT with navigation right has an advantageous period during which the corresponding navigation effect is executed when the three-choice roles (1) to (3), the replay GR (1), and the replay GR (2) are won, and the replay GR ( 1) and a replay GR (2) may be included, including a disadvantageous period during which the corresponding navigation effect is not executed. In addition, even if it is an unfavorable period, for the three alternative roles (1) to (3), the corresponding navigation effect is executed when winning.

  The advantageous period is continuously controlled until a predetermined advantageous period ending condition is satisfied, such as winning a replay (2) to (6), using a predetermined number of games, winning a bonus or winning. Among the advantageous period termination conditions, when the game is terminated by using a predetermined number of games, it is controlled to a disadvantage period.

  As for the disadvantageous period, whether to win the replays (2) to (6), use the prescribed number of games (for example, 30 games), win a bonus or win, stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific winning combination, etc. The control is continued until a predetermined disadvantage period termination condition is satisfied. Among the disadvantageous period termination conditions, when the game is terminated due to the consumption of the prescribed number of games or the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination, the period is controlled to the advantageous period. Note that the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination may be, for example, a symbol combination of a specific kind of small role, and a specific symbol combination that can be stopped only when a specific winning combination is won. It may be.

  By setting the disadvantage period termination condition and the advantage period termination condition as described above, in the disadvantage period during the RT with navigation right, the replays (2) to (6) are won until the specified number of games are consumed by oneself. While avoiding or stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination, it is controlled during an advantageous period in which the corresponding navigation effect is executed when the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (2) is won In the advantageous period during the RT with navigation right, it is possible to avoid winning the replays (2) to (6) based on the navigation effect. By controlling, the disadvantageous period and the advantageous period can be looped.

  Note that the predetermined number of games for which the advantageous period end condition is satisfied may be selected from a plurality of types of games for each advantageous period to be started. For example, depending on whether the advantageous period starts when the predetermined number of games are consumed in the disadvantaged period, or the symbol combination corresponding to a specific winning combination is started in the disadvantaged period In this case, it may be configured to select from a plurality of types of games. Thereby, whenever an advantageous period is started, a player can be made to pay attention to how many games are controlled continuously, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, immediately after being controlled by RT with navigation right, it may start from an advantageous period or may start from an unfavorable period. For example, immediately after being controlled to RT with navigation right, it may always start from one of the predetermined periods of the advantageous period and the unfavorable period. Immediately after being controlled to RT with navigation right, every time control to RT with navigation right is started, depending on the game situation in the CB (for example, the number of wins and winnings of a predetermined small role) It may be configured to select whether to start from an advantageous period or from an unfavorable period.

  Even in the case of the configuration as described above, control to RT with navigation right after completion of the bonus, granting of navigation right, addition of more navigation times, control to RT with navigation right Immediately after being played, the expectation for starting from an advantageous period can be increased, and the interest of the game in the bonus can be improved.

  (8) The slot machine in the above-described embodiment may be configured such that, for example, in the initial gaming state, the special combination and the small combination are won simultaneously. Further, the combination of the special combination and the small combination that are won simultaneously may be as follows. In the following, bonus (A) and bonus (B) are exemplified as special roles, and each of bonuses (A) and (B) is a predetermined orange (combination of constituent symbols: orange-orange-orange) or plum. In the internal lottery, one of 15 small payouts such as (combination of structural symbols: plum-plum-plum) and one single payout such as 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be selected at the same time. An example will be described in which a big bonus and a small combination that are read out as a combination and are simultaneously read out can be won in duplicate. The combinations to be read out as the lottery target combinations are orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 ( 2) Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are included. The bonus (A) and bonus (B) may be the following combinations. For example, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the challenge bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment.

  These bonuses (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2), each symbol (combination of symbols) is 5 frames in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In principle, combinations that cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing are set.

  Further, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the symbols (combination of symbols) constituting each of the symbols (1) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won at the same time as the bonus (A), and the combination of each (1) are configured so that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  Further, a bonus (B), a plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and symbols (combination of symbols) constituting each combination of symbols (2) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (B), the plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and the combination of one (2) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the symbols (combination of symbols) that make up the roles of orange, one sheet (1), plum, and one sheet (2) are arranged in excess of four frames that are the maximum drawing range in a given reel. Therefore, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  The slot machine including such bonus (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2) as a winning combination has the following configuration. May be.

  (8-1) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific role is missed, there is a suggestion that the specific role will be missed by stopping a specific stop mode that does not stop if none of the roles are elected. If the player does not know the specific stop mode that stops when he misses, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether the particular role that was missed has been missed. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won and the first stop (stop operation of any reel while all reels are changing) If the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange symbol cannot be drawn into the winning line, the control of pulling the plum role symbol into any of the winning lines is performed and the remaining reels When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the orange symbol can be drawn into the winning line where the plum symbol is stopped, the orange symbol is displayed on the stopped winning line of the plum symbol Control to pull in.

  Also, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and the constituent symbols for the Orange will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the constituent symbol of the orange part is changed to the winning line where the constituent part of the orange part is stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where the constituent symbol of the orange role was stopped at the time of the second stop because the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position that could not be withdrawn, When one reel is moving and the last reel is stopped), the orange line will be displayed on the winning line where the orange pattern is stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the stop operation position retractable configuration pattern is performed, thereby performing the control to draw a structure pattern orange combination the winning line stop structure symbol orange combination was at the first stop.

  In other words, even if orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the remaining symbols can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control to align a part of the combination with the winning line is performed.

  Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Similar control is performed.

  Therefore, even if orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and orange is missed at the first stop or second stop When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position at which the structure of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning line. Even when the orange is missed at the time of 2 stops, it can be easily determined whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of orange matches the winning line. Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and the orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. In case of an error, the symbol that is used as an indicator (the structural symbol of the plum role if it is missed during the first stop, the structural symbol of the orange role that was stopped during the first stop if it is missed during the second stop) The stop position is regarded as a stop position where the structural symbol has stopped, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of orange combinations on the winning line, and a stop for stopping a part of the combination of orange combinations on the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop and the second stop. Since there is no need to prepare a separate control table, the stop control table is used even when control is performed to align a part of the combination of oranges with the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop or the second stop. Storage capacity can be reduced. The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  (8-2) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the expectation was given to the winning of the special role according to the stopping mode of the small role, the stopping mode at the time of winning the single role of the small role is different from the stopping mode at the time of simultaneous winning of the small role and the special role. There is a problem that it can be determined from the player whether or not the special combination is won according to the mode, and the expectation is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected at the stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange roles on the winning line.

  Among them, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are elected, among the stop operation positions where the combination of orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination is selected as the winning line L1, L2, L3. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that can be aligned only to the winning line and the stop operation position that can be aligned to any of the winning lines L1 to L5, the combination of the orange combination is selected as the winning line L1, L2, L3. It is possible to align the combination of the orange combination only with the winning lines L4 and L5, and only when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. Is controlled to match the winning lines L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, when orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, out of the stop operation positions where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line If the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L5, orange is displayed. It is possible to align the combination of the winning combination with the winning lines L4 and L5, and the orange combination can be aligned with only the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. At the stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. Only when the stop operation is performed, control for aligning the combination of oranges to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 is performed.

  That is, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination is selected as the winning line L4, Controls to align the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 over L5. Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges is the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, the combination of the orange combination is controlled in preference to the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  Similarly, when the plum, bonus (B) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the plums can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the plums is selected as the winning line L4, The winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are controlled prior to L5. Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plum roles is the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, control is performed so that the combination of plums is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  With such a configuration, when orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are won, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned to the winning lines L1, L2, L3. If there is a high possibility, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are elected There is a high possibility that the combination of orange combination or plum combination will be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. In other words, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, Orange and Plum win, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 ( 1) Plum + 1 piece (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 piece (2), winning line where the combination of orange or plum combination is easy to match when orange and plum wins Is different.

  After the reel control as described above is performed, in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) in the total value of the orange, bonus (A) + orange winning probabilities and the ratio of the orange winning probability is orange + 1. (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + Bonus (A) + Orange + Bonus (1) A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) than the ratio of Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum winning probability to the total value of Plum winning probability Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + with the probability that the winning probability ratio of bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) in the total value of winning probability will be high Draw lots of plums + 1 (2).

  As a result, when Orange and 1 sheet (1) are elected at the same time, both Orange and 1 sheet (1) are won at the same time as Bonus (A). The percentage increases, and when the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time, the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time as the bonus (B). As the winning ratio of the combination of oranges or plums is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5, the game for winning the special role Can change the expectation of a person.

  In addition, even if the winning line with the combination of orange or plum roles is the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may have been won. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the winning line where the roles are aligned, and the special role has been won regardless of the winning line. The player's expectation for the game will not be lost.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Stop operation position where orange + 1 combination (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is selected, and the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at, the combination of the combination of orange or plum is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. However, orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are selected, and a stop operation that can draw the combination of orange or plum combination into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line when the stop operation is performed at the position, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is set to the winning line L1, Control is performed only for L2 and L3, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line, It may perform control to align the combination of the winning pay line L4, L5 only.

  In this example, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of the bonus (A) + orange to the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (the ratio of the winning probability of Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) to the total value of the winning probability of Orange + 1 (1) is different) 1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange has been won, at the stop operation position where the combination of orange can be drawn into the winning line When the stop operation is performed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, the player's winning against the special role winning is based on the difference in the winning line with the combination of orange roles The degree of expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) ( The ratio of the winning probability of 1) and the orange (+1) (1), bonus (A) + orange winning probability ratio in the total value of the winning probability (A) + orange are different in proportion to the orange, Lottery of bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange is selected, By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned in the stop operation position where the combination of the winning combination can be drawn into the winning line is different from that in the winning operation line, Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed. The same applies to the case of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2).

  (8-3) In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific combination is missed, if there is no winning combination, there will be a change in the reel stop mode by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop. There is a problem that there is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when the specific combination is missed by performing the stop operation at the same timing, and the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  When the orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, the predetermined chance except for the orange combination or the plum combination is won. Priority is given to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 over the lines L4 and L5, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning line cannot be drawn into the winning line, control is performed so that the chance line is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line, a chance is won from the winning lines L4 and L5. Priority is given to the lines L1, L2, and L3. Plum +1 (2), bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  As a result, even if Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange is won, or Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination will be aligned on the winning line, but if orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, In other words, if only orange out of orange (1) is elected alone and the orange is missed, chances are high that the winning lines are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, orange + 1 (1), If the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) is won, that is, if both the orange (1) and 1 (1) win simultaneously and miss the orange There are likely to align in winning lines L4, L5. Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, or when Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of plums will be aligned on the winning line, but if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected, In other words, if only one of the plums (1) (2) wins alone and loses the plum, chances are high that the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are aligned. If the bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won, that is, if both the plum (1) (2) wins and loses the plum at the same time, the chance will be placed on the winning lines L4 and L5. Possible It is high.

  As a result, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped at the time.

  The chances are that Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are controlled to match any winning line on condition that the orange and plum are missed. When a combination or combination of combinations is not won, the chances are not aligned with any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of having won the special role is surely suggested by having a chance line in any of the winning lines.

  In this example, as described above, the bonus (A) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time is more than the case where the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. ) At the same time, the percentage of winning prizes will increase, and a bonus will be awarded when a plum and one piece (2) of the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time, rather than when the plum is won alone. B) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the winning line with special chances will depend on whether the winning line is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to give a change to the degree of expectation of the player.

  Furthermore, even if the winning lines with the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 and the winning lines L4 and L5, it is suggested that the special role may have been won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role is won regardless of which winning line the chances match. The feeling of expectation will not be spoiled.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 The winning line where the chances are easy to match will change when winning (1), plum +1 (2), bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) and winning orange or plum. However, chances 1 and 2 with different display modes are determined, and orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum is won and orange +1 is lost and orange +1 Sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected and orange and plum are removed. And if spilled, in appearance and easy chance eyes of types may be changed.

  In this example, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, the chance is won at a higher rate than the winning lines L4 and L5. Controls aligning with the lines L1, L2, and L3, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When winning and dropping oranges and plums, control is performed to align the winning lines with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + If a Plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, the chances are aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 Control, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) will be selected and orange and plum will be lost In this case, the control may be performed so that the chances are aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  In addition, in this example, when orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is won at the same time as bonus (A) than when orange and one sheet (1) are elected alone. The ratio of the winning combination is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. By increasing the winning percentage, the player's expectation for winning the special role depends on whether the winning lines with the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. 1st RT When the transition is made and the chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5, the first RT has an advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of re-playing role, presence / absence of notification of winning role type, notification rate, etc.) It may be configured to shift to a different second RT. By adopting such a configuration, when orange or plum is missed, not only the display mode of the reels is diversified, but the same chance is also placed on the winning line. Even if the display mode is uniform, when orange and plum are elected alone, there is a possibility of transition when orange and plum are dropped, orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2) In the case where is elected, the advantage can be changed between orange and RT which may shift when a plum is missed.

  (9) The RT is not limited to the type shown in the above-described embodiment, and the probability of winning at least one of Replay (1), Replay GR (1), and Replay GR (2) and the number of specified games are different. It may be controllable to a plurality of types of RT.

  In the case of such a configuration, the RT may be controlled so that the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on the type of bonus that has been completed. The degree of advantage for the player is different, for example, that the number of prescribed games is different, that the winning probability of winning at least one of Replay (1), Replay GR (1), and Replay GR (2) is different. Say. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which RT is controlled and which bonus is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this way, when configured to be controlled to RT according to the type of bonus, the combination of bonuses that triggers control to RT is composed of different symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel It may be. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bonus is won when a bonus is won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, and makes it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the type of RT controlled after the bonus ends.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made larger than the area of the transparent window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight, and the variable display device 2 is transparent. You may install in the position which is easier to visually recognize than the window 3. FIG. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of melons is derived in the variable display device 2, “melon-melon-melon” may be stopped and displayed on a winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the bonuses that trigger the above-mentioned control of RT wins, regardless of the type of bonus that has been won, a common “ “7-7-7” may be stopped and displayed. This makes it difficult for a player who views the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and determines which type of bonus has been won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  In addition, the RT termination condition controlled after the bonus ends is satisfied by using a predetermined number of games, winning one of the replays (2) to (6), or winning a bonus ( It may be configured not to be established by winning a bonus. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss due to the RT being ended after the bonus is ended because the bonus has been won before the predetermined number of games is consumed. . In addition, since the bonus winning flag is carried over until the next game is won, after reaching the predetermined number of games, after the bonus has ended, the winning bonus can be won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT after the bonus ends.

  In addition, the RT replay winning probability controlled after the bonus is over is an RT with a high possibility of obtaining medals, that is, the expected value of the number of medals per game is more than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. Is set so that RT becomes smaller. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  In the case of such a configuration, when a bonus is won (further, a predetermined notification condition (a specific winning combination, a specific symbol combination derivation, etc.) may be satisfied) The type of small prize winning that has been determined to be allowed to be generated by means (a small part that can be won depending on the operating procedure and a case where it is missed) or an operating procedure for generating the small prize winning Deciding whether or not to control to a procedure notification gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a state of performing a navigation effect, referred to as AT) for notifying (operation timing, operation order, etc.), and when controlling to AT, an AT continuing game controlled by AT When the number is decided and it is decided to control to AT, it is configured to control to RT + AT until the number of AT continuing games is consumed or the bonus is won and RT is finished. Good. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased. Further, when the player is further controlled by the AT during the RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the bonus may have been won, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, even if the bonus is not won, the player is given a sense of expectation because it is controlled to RT + AT when the predetermined notification condition described above is satisfied.

  (10) As an RT termination condition in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described that is established by winning a replay (2) to (6) or winning a big bonus. However, the RT end condition is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be satisfied by using a predetermined number of games or winning a bonus.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (12) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (13) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view of a slot machine. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure for demonstrating the item relevant to the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure which shows the object combination of the internal lottery classified by game state. It is a figure which shows the re-game player which aligns to a winning line according to stop operation timing of a left reel at the time of replay GR winning. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the reel control in CB. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control performed when either of 3 choice combination (1)-(3) is elected in RT. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing signals input / output between the slot machine and the test apparatus. 4 is a timing chart showing signal input / output states between the slot machine and the test apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of a stop execution position signal, a stop reel designation | designated signal, and a stop strobe signal.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 32L, 32C, 32R reel motor, 34 hopper unit, 35 overflow tank, 35a full sensor, 41 main control unit, 41a CPU 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 91 sub-control unit, 91a CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM.

Claims (6)

A game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and one game is completed by deriving the identification information to each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. A slot machine capable of generating a winning according to a combination of identification information on a predetermined winning line derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a plurality of types of specific winnings before the identification information is derived in each of the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation accepting means for accepting an operation for deriving the identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas;
In accordance with the operation accepted by the derivation operation accepting means, the predetermining means among the identification information that can be derived within a predetermined delay time from the time when the operation is accepted in each of the plurality of variable display areas. Derivation control means for performing control for deriving identification information according to the determination result of
At least a specific variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas includes first identification information that constitutes a combination of identification information that generates a first specific prize among the plurality of types of specific prizes, The identification is made so that both of the second identification information constituting a combination of identification information for generating the second specific winning of the specific winnings are not included in the range of identification information derivable within the range of the delay time. Information is displayed in a variable manner
The derivation control means includes a first winning permission derivation control means for performing control for deriving identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when it is determined that the occurrence of the first specific winning is permitted. A second winning allowance derivation control means for performing control for deriving identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when it is determined that the second specific winning is allowed to occur,
The first winning allowance derivation control means includes:
In a state where the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the identification information derivable within the delay time range includes the first identification information in the specific variable display area at a first timing. When an operation for deriving identification information is accepted, the first identification information is derived on the winning line, and the first specific winning is generated also in other variable display areas other than the specific variable display area Deriving first specific identification information constituting a combination of identification information on the winning line;
In a state in which the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the identification information derivable within the delay time range includes the second identification information in the specific variable display area at a second timing. When an operation for deriving identification information is accepted, the second identification information is derived on the winning line, and a combination of identification information for generating the second specific winning is formed in the other variable display area. Without deriving the second specific identification information on the winning line,
The second winning allowance derivation control means includes:
When the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, when the operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area is accepted at the second timing, the second identification information is received as the prize. And the second specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the other variable display area.
When the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, the first identification information is received as the winning when an operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area is received at the first timing. A slot machine characterized in that the first specific identification information is not derived on the winning line in the other variable display area while being derived on the line. After the first winning allowance deriving control means derives the second identification information on the winning line of the specific variable display area, the identification information is finally included in the other variable display areas. The second specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the variable display area excluding the derived final variable display area, and identification information different from the second specific identification information is provided on the winning line in the final variable display area. Derived,
After the second winning allowance derivation control means derives the first identification information on the winning line of the specific variable display area, the identification information is finally included in the other variable display areas. The first specific identification information is derived on the winning line in the variable display area excluding the derived final variable display area, and identification information different from the first specific identification information is provided on the winning line in the final variable display area. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the slot machine is derived.   The derivation control means is configured to perform the derivation operation in a state in which any of the first specific winning and the second specific winning is not permitted and the identification information is variably displayed in all variable display areas. When the accepting unit accepts an operation for deriving the identification information in the specific variable display area at the first timing, the accepting unit derives the first identification information on the winning line and accepts the operation at the second timing. The second identification information is derived on the winning line, and the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information are not derived on the winning line in the other variable display area. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising a control unit. The first specific identification information and the second specific identification information are the same type of specific identification information,
The derivation control means, in a state where the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display areas, before the derivation operation accepting means accepts an operation for deriving the identification information to the specific variable display area. When the operation for deriving the identification information to the other variable display area is accepted, the other area preceding derivation control is performed such that the specific identification information is preferentially derived on the winning line among the plurality of types of identification information. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising means.   When any one of the first specific prize and the second specific prize occurs, a privilege granting unit for granting a predetermined privilege different from the provision of the game value for setting the bet number is further provided. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the slot machine is characterized by the following. Command output means for outputting a command for identifying a type of winning that is allowed to be generated among the plurality of types of winnings;
An informing means for informing information capable of specifying a type of winning that is allowed to be generated based on the command when a predetermined informing condition is established;
The informing means is an external test apparatus that performs processing for deriving the same identification information to each of the plurality of variable display areas when the derivation operation accepting means accepts an operation in an operation procedure based on predetermined operation procedure information. , Including an external output means for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure,
The external output means outputs, as the recommended operation procedure information, operation procedure information for specifying an operation procedure according to information notified by the notification device when the notification condition is satisfied. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the slot machine is characterized.

Images